JP2023182147A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine characterized in display means.SOLUTION: When a certain operation is performed when a door body is in an open state and a detection state of detection means is in an open detection state (first state), display of a management display can be started. Even if the certain operation is performed while reels are rotating in the first state, the display of the management display is not started. When the reels are stopped in a first stop mode by a stop button while the reels are rotating in the first state and the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display is started. When the reels are stopped in a second stop mode by the stop button while the reels are rotating in the first state and the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display is not started.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, as one type of game machine such as a slot machine or a pachinko machine, there is a game machine equipped with various display means (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-296354

However, there is room for improvement in the display means of conventional game machines.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a unique display means.

The game machine according to the present invention includes a display means, a light emitting means, a door body that is provided on the front surface of the game machine and can be opened and closed, a detection means that can detect the open and closed state of the door body, and a certain operation is possible. a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate; and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels. and, the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. means that can change the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and by performing a predetermined operation regarding the detection means, the detection state can be changed even if the door body is in the open state. is configured such that the detection state of the door is in the closed detection state, the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection means is configured to be in the closed detection state. is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed while the detection state is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"); Even if the certain operation is performed in the first state and the reels are rotating, the display of the management display is not started; and when the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode by the stop button in a state where the certain operation is being performed, displaying the management display is started. and when the reels are in the first state and the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode by the stop button. The control display is configured not to start displaying the management display when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, and the certain operation is performed. The display is configured such that display of the management display cannot be started even if the management display is displayed, and the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management display is displayed. Even in the case where the management display continues to be displayed, the light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode when a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. The light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first light-emitting mode when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the light-emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. when the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the light emission means is capable of emitting light in a second light emission mode, and the light emission means is capable of emitting light in a second light emission mode when the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state; The game machine is characterized in that the light is turned off when the state is the closure detection state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a unique display means.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. (a) It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) developed in a two-dimensional manner. (b) It is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of setting value confirmation processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing. (A) A diagram showing the flow of a setting change mode in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) A diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing the flow of display example 5 of the management screen in chronological order. (B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 6 of the management screen in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of error notification in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of error notification in chronological order. (A) A diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order. (B) It is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order. (A) A diagram showing the flow of displaying setting history in chronological order. (B) A diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order. (A) It is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed. (B) It is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is displayed. This is a simple game flow showing an AT type game state. (a) It is a diagram showing an example of transition of performance states in an advantageous section. (b) A diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in the normal stage. (c) It is a figure showing an example of the CZ judgment table used for CZ lottery in stock time. It is a diagram showing an example of performance in stock time in chronological order. It is a diagram showing an example of production in a normal stage in chronological order. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 3 shows a circuit block diagram of a control section. It is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) developed in a two-dimensional manner. It is a diagram showing types of winning combinations, names of condition devices, symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, number of payouts, and notes. (a) It is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and notes corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (press order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning). (b) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which the small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and the AT game. (c) It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won and the setting suggestion performance A. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and the low probability mode of setting suggestion performance A. (b) It is a figure showing an example of a setting suggestion performance A selection table used for setting suggestion performance A lottery. (a) It is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and the low probability mode of setting suggestion performance B. (b) It is a figure showing an example of a setting suggestion performance B selection table used for setting suggestion performance B lottery. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. (a) is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400; (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400; (a) It is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500; (c) It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (d) It is a flowchart of image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. It is a figure showing example 1 of a setting suggestion performance A in chronological order. It is a figure showing example 2 of a setting suggestion performance A in chronological order. It is a diagram showing a presentation example of setting suggestion presentation B in chronological order.

<<Embodiment 1>>
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine (slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 (door body) that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. and. Note that the front door 102 (door body) will be described later using FIG. 2.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112 (see FIG. 4). a)). From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in approximately three vertical directions from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, making a total of nine symbols visible. There is.

By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light emitter and a light receiver is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light part and the light receiving part. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 may, for example, notify the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery to be described later, or that he or she is playing a bonus game (in a special game state). This is a lamp to notify you. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay combination that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a warning lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be. On the left side of the medal slot 141, there is a cross key 193a (second operating means, upper button) that is an operating means for selecting menus, adjusting the volume, etc. on the management screen SD, volume value display VD, etc., which will be described later. , a lower button, a right button, and a left button) and an OK button 193b (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as the "cross button 193").

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals that will be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a press order effect. In this example, the stored coin count display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout coin count display 127 are configured with 7-segment (SEG) displays.

A start lever 135 (operating means) is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop operation. operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or press order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) left → center → right operation order (left center right or LCR), (2) left → right → center operation order (left center center or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation order ( (center left/right or CLR), (4) center → right → left operation order (center right left or CRL), (5) right → left → center operation order (right left center or RLC), (6) right → center → left There are six types of operation orders (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160.

This performance device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. (hereinafter also referred to as an "effect image display device"), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is displayed in front of the slot machine 100. (on the player's side).

Note that the display means does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, etc. It may be a display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, there is provided a setting key switch (first operating means; hereinafter also referred to as "setting key SW"; not shown) that can be turned on and off by rotational operation. This setting key SW is an operation means for starting setting changes and confirmation of setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6), which will be described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter also referred to as a "reset SW") is provided that can be pressed to perform an operation for changing settings (setting value changing operation). This reset SW is an operating means that also functions as an error release switch that can perform operations to eliminate various errors (error elimination operations), which will be described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and when the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state. is difficult or impossible to operate. In other words, it is an operating means that can only be operated by the manager (clerk, etc.) of the game parlor, and cannot be operated by the player.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting value display device 101a (see FIG. 12) capable of displaying setting values is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is configured with a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when a setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any of settings 1 to 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting value is set by operating the start lever 135. Once the value is confirmed, the set value will be hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, a numerical value indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

A medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112, is a power supply device having a power supply board. 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as a main control unit 300, sub-control units 400, 500, etc., which will be described later. do. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion to which a power cord 264 is connected, and the power cord 264 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and is a door body that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102, which is locked in the closed state, can be opened by inserting a key owned by the manager of the game parlor into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change it from the closed state to the open state), but anyone other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

The right side plate 260 of the main body 101 is provided with an optical sensor (detection means; hereinafter also referred to as "opening/closing sensor"; not shown) consisting of a light emitter and a light receiver. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass between the front door 102 and the light receiving section.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this opening/closing sensor in main control timer interrupt processing to be described later. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it blocks light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101, the opening/closing sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output to the main control section 300.

That is, the opening/closing sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In this case, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

Note that the "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Furthermore, the detection state is not limited to one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state always switch as the door body opens and closes, and the detection state can change to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state. Alternatively, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be in the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured such that when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state even if the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape etc. By blocking the light from the light emitting part of the opening/closing sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor can be forced into the closed detection state.

Note that the "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example; for example, a DIP switch that turns the open/close sensor into a closed detection state may be provided and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is constituted by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing a magnet close to the opening/closing sensor.

At the top of the symbol display window 113, a production device 160, a production control board (not shown) for controlling the production device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 3. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. A ROM 306 for storing position, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random value generation circuit 316 (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits) that derives a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315a. ) and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 outputs a start signal (reset signal). Start game control (start main control unit main processing described later).

Random value generation circuit 316 generates random values used in basic circuit 302. There are two types of methods for generating random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two additional methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to use a random value seed to perform an operation according to a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derive the result of this operation as a random number value. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random numerical value. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the obtained value as the initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use

The main control unit 300 is also equipped with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and an optical system for the reel 110. The state of the sensor, optical sensor of the reel 111, optical sensor of the reel 112, opening/closing sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and are used to insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation when The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of reel 110, the optical sensor of reel 111, and the optical sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

As described above, the opening/closing sensor is a sensor capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is in the closed state, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) to the CPU 304 indicating that the front door 102 is in the closed state. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the opening/closing sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high level signal) to the CPU 304 indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) etc. via this information output circuit 334. Gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. , this basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. has been done.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 that can detect the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a press operation of the production button 156. is connected to a production button sensor 430 that can detect. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the production device 160 including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157. Note that the second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various production drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units, such as.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 4(a). Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 21 symbols with numbers 0 to 20) of a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a “Replay” symbol, the number 0 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “Bell” symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a “Bell” symbol. "Watermelon" designs are placed on each page.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 4(b). The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including activation combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the activation or payout of each winning combination.

Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and regular bonus (RB) are used as winning combinations that transition to a bonus game, and the replay is a replay without inserting new medals. In this embodiment, the winning roles include the big bonus, regular bonus, and replay, which are the active roles. included. In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, such as a big bonus, a regular Includes bonuses and replay wins.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a big bonus (BB1, BB2), a regular bonus (RB), a small combination (cherry, watermelon, bell), and a replay combination (replay). It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

“Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)” (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “BB”) is a special winning combination (activation winning combination) that starts a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, upon winning a prize. . The corresponding symbol combinations are "white 7-white 7-white 7" for BB1 and "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" for BB2. Furthermore, flag carryover is performed for BB1 and BB2. In other words, if BB1 or BB2 is internally won, a flag indicating this will be set (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300), but even if BB1 or BB2 is not won in that game, the winning will not be possible. The flag indicating internal winning will remain on until the next game, and even after the next game, BB1 and BB2 will be internally won, and the symbol combination "White 7-White 7-White 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol corresponding to BB2 will remain on. The combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" is in a state where they all win prizes.

“Regular Bonus (RB)” is a special winning combination (activation winning combination) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) upon winning. The corresponding symbol combination is "bonus-bonus-bonus". Note that flag carryover is also carried out for RB in the same way as for BB described above. However, (details will be described later), in the big bonus game (BB game), the starting condition is not that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won or that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. In addition, the regular bonus game is set to start automatically after the start of the big bonus game, and when one regular bonus game is finished, the next regular bonus game is started immediately. You can also use it as

"Small winning combination (Cherry, Watermelon, Bell)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Bell") is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning. The symbol combinations are "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. Further, the corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In the case of "Cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 only needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 may be any symbol.

A "replay" is a winning combination (activation combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. Note that the corresponding symbol combination is "Replay-Replay-Replay".

<Types of RT-type gaming states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based gaming states in the slot machine 100 will be explained.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is the default RT-type gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "normal gaming state") that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is powered on, and is a This is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous compared to other gaming states.

In this example, in this low re-gaming probability state (RT1), when re-gaming combination 2 (promotion replay 1) or re-gaming combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, the re-gaming high probability state (RT2) described below is entered. to move to. In addition, in this re-gaming low probability state (RT1), if a special winning combination is won internally, the state shifts to a special winning winning state (RT3) which will be described later.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The re-gaming high probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of re-gaming is higher than the re-gaming low probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this re-gaming high probability state (RT2), when a special winning combination is won internally, the state shifts to a special winning winning state (RT3) which will be described later.

<Special role internal election status (RT3)>
The special prize internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special prize is set on, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, the special prize corresponding to this flag is won. This is a gaming state in which a corresponding symbol combination can be displayed.

In this example, when a special prize is won in this special prize internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) to be described later.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states. In this example, in the special gaming state (RT4), when a specified number of coins (for example, 200 coins) are paid out, the state shifts to the low re-gaming probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special gaming state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may include, for example, when a predetermined role is won internally, when a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 8) are won, or when a predetermined prize is won. This may be the case where the game has been played a number of times (for example, six times).

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes main control section main processing according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Although details will be described later, in this initial setting process, processes related to initial settings, setting changes, return processing, etc. are performed.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insert command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if you win a replay winning combination in the previous game, the process will be performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, and the player will be able to play again due to replay. No input is required. Further, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process advances to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine a valid winning line.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process is performed to acquire the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316, and in the next step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random numbers, and the results of this internal lottery are Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command shown to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Note that this reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Further, in step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed, and rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109.

In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed to determine a winning prize. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a small winning combination (Bell) has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the winning determination result to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, processing related to transition of each RT system game state is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. Also, preparations are made for transmitting a gaming status command including information indicating the current RT-based gaming status.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Initial setting process>
Next, using FIG. 6, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described using FIG. 5 will be described. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of initial setting processing.

In step S201, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting at startup includes setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I/O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting of the WDT 314. Permit operation and set initial values.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308. If there is an abnormality, the process advances to step S207 to execute initialization processing, and if there is no abnormality, the process advances to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is in an open state (door open), and if the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204, and if the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S205, where return processing is performed. Execute. Further, in step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute a setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute a return process. .

In the recovery process of step S205, a process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power outage (for example, restoring the recovery data saved in the RAM 308 in the power outage process of step S411 of the main control unit timer interrupt process) is executed. After that, the initial setting process ends.

In step S206, after performing a setting change process, the process advances to step S207. Although details will be described later, in this setting change process, processing related to setting changes, etc. are performed.

In step S207, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, after initializing the data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear), etc., the initialization process ends.

<Settings change process>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described using FIG. 6 will be described using FIG. 7. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing.

In step S301, processing to initialize data in the RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, preparations are made for transmitting a setting change start command indicating to start changing settings to the first sub-control unit 400. I do. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set to changing settings. As a result, in various game processing in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt processing to be described later, processing corresponding to the setting change is executed.

In step S304, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In step S305, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated, and if there has been an operation, the current set value is changed, and if there has been no operation, the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in step S307. , repeats the process of step S305.

More specifically, in the processing of steps S305 to S307, each time an operation of the reset SW is detected, the currently set values 1 to 6 are incremented and updated by 1, so that the set value reaches 6. The set value is changed by repeatedly returning it to 1 when it exceeds it. If it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation to change the set value using the reset SW is ended, and the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new setting value (setting value is determined), and in the next step S309, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased. and hide the setting value.

Note that in this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, but a process for determining whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state is added, The configuration may be such that the set value is determined only in the case of the state. In this case, if the front door 102 is in the closed state, the set value cannot be determined, but the management screen may continue to be displayed.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON, and if it is ON, the process of step S310 is repeatedly executed, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S311 to end the setting change. In step S311, preparations are made for transmitting a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to be ended. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change termination command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed. In step S402, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S403, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S405, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S406, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S407, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Although details will be described later, this device monitoring process includes a setting value confirmation process, a door opening monitoring process, a payment process, and the like.

In step S409, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process advances to step S411, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process advances to step S410.

In step S410, various processes are performed to terminate the timer interrupt termination process. In this timer interrupt termination process, a process is performed in which the values of each register temporarily saved in step S401 are set in each original register, and the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S411, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as restoration data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. and returns to main control unit main processing.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt process described using FIG. 8 will be described using FIG. 9. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

In step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 after performing a setting value confirmation process. Although details will be described later, in this setting value confirmation process, processing related to setting confirmation is performed. In step S502, door opening monitoring processing is performed.

In the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the opening/closing sensor, and when detecting a signal indicating the closure detection state, stores closure detection information indicating that the closure of the front door 102 has been detected in the RAM 308. At the same time, preparations are made for transmitting a door closing detection command indicating that closing of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door closure detection command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 generates closure detection information (in this example, information indicating “closed”) indicating that the front door 102 has been closed. , date and time of closure) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as historical information.

On the other hand, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the opening/closing sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating that it is in the opening detection state, it sends opening detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected. In addition to storing it in the RAM 308, preparations are made for transmitting a door open detection command indicating that opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 generates open detection information (in this example, information indicating “open”) indicating that the front door 102 has been opened. , date and time of opening) are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information, and a door opening notification is performed.

Door open notification will be described later, but in this example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "The door is opening"). Note that the mode of the door open notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a character string "The door is open" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In step S503, after performing a payment process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this payment processing, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the payment button 134 sensor during the validity period of the payment button 134 (for example, the period from when the game becomes possible to start until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). , upon detecting a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated, performs processing to settle the electronically stored medals, and sends a settlement command indicating that the processing to settle the medals has been executed to the first sub-control. 400.

In step S504, after performing other device monitoring processing, the device monitoring processing ends. Although details will be described later, other device monitoring processes include error notification start processing, error notification end processing, and the like.

<Setting value confirmation process>
Next, using FIG. 10, the setting value confirmation process (step S501) in the device monitoring process described using FIG. 9 will be described. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the setting value is being confirmed. If the setting value is being confirmed, the process advances to step S606, and if the setting value is not being confirmed, the process advances to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not it is the set value confirmation valid period. If it is the set value confirmation valid period, the process proceeds to step S603, and if it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the setting value confirmation process is ended.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not the MAX bet state (the state where the number of medals that can start one game (3 in this example) is bet, or the replay state due to replay), but the open/close state. This is a period in which the sensor is not in a closure detection state, any of the reels 110 to 112 are not rotating, and no error notification is being issued.

Note that the conditions regarding the set value confirmation valid period are not all of the above conditions, and may be any one of the above conditions or any plurality of the above conditions.

In step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, the setting value confirmation process is ended, and if it is ON, the process advances to step S604. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made for transmitting a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen.

In step S606 during setting confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON, and if it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is ended to continue setting confirmation, and if it is OFF, the process returns to step S607. move on. In step S607, the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting values, and in the next step S608, a setting confirmation end command indicating that setting confirmation is to be ended is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Make preparations for When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to end the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, other device monitoring processing (step S504) in the device monitoring processing described using FIG. 9 will be described using FIG. 11. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processing.

In step S701, it is determined whether the device is in each error detection state, and if it is not in each error detection state, the other device monitoring processing is ended, and if it is in each error detection state, the process advances to step S702.

Here, the errors that may occur in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment include door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error), medal insertion error 2 to 4, and medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error). Examples include payout abnormalities 1 to 3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, prize winning abnormality, etc.

The door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game machine, and occurs when the front door 102 is opened (an error detection state occurs), and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. (No error detected).

As described above, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the opening/closing sensor, and upon detecting a signal indicating the closing detection state, sends a door closing detection command to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the closure detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in the RAM 408 in chronological order as historical information, while also storing the closure detection information (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in the open detection state. When a signal indicating "open" is detected, a door open detection command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends the door open detection information (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening). are stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as historical information, and a door opening notification is performed.

The hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 becomes less than the specified number (an error detection state occurs). The problem can be resolved by replenishing the hopper with the above medals (the error will not be detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) occurs when the inserted medals remain in the medal selector, etc. (an error detection state occurs), and after removing the cause of the error, the error release switch (in this example, reset SW ) is resolved (no error detected). Medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of inserted medals is equal to or greater than the specified number (an error detection state occurs), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM (an error non-detection state occurs).

Medal insertion error 3 occurs when either insertion sensor 1 or insertion sensor 2 is turned on (an error detection state occurs) other than during the medal insertion process, and medal insertion error 4 occurs when the inserted medal is not inserted. This occurs when sensor 1 and input sensor 2 are not passed normally (an error detection state occurs), and it is resolved when the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is operated after the cause of the error is removed. (No error detected).

Medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when no medals are paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is activated (an error detection state occurs), and medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals are accumulated when the medal payout device is activated. However, the medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal payout process (it becomes an error detection state). After removing the cause, the error is resolved (the error is not detected) when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted.

An overflow error occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on (an error detection state occurs), and after the cause of the error is removed, the operation of the error release switch (in this example, the reset SW) is accepted. It will be resolved if the error occurs (the error will become undetected). A RAM defect occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (it becomes an error detection state), and it is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (in this example, the reset SW) is accepted (it becomes an error non-detection state). Become). A winning abnormality occurs when, after the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, a winning symbol different from the winning symbol determined by the internal lottery is won (an error detection state occurs), and the error release switch (in this example, the reset SW) is operated. If it is accepted, it will be resolved (no error detected).

Note that the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, but can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in pachinko machines include, for example, lower tray full error, dispensing device error, overdispensing error, incorrect dispensing error, main control communication error, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, frame opening error, and RAM clear error. , impact sensor error, etc. These errors are also resolved when the error release switch is operated after the cause of the error is removed.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not it is an error notification period. If it is not an error notification period, the process proceeds to other device monitoring processing. If it is an error notification period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error notification period is a period during which settings are not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether each error is being reported. If not, the process advances to step S704; if each error is being reported, the process advances to step S705. In step S704, error notification start processing is executed.

In this error notification start process, the main control section 300 displays an error code on the payout number display 127 and prepares to transmit an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub-control section 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start error notification.

Error notification will be described later, but in this example, when a selector error occurs, the character string "Selector error has occurred!!" is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), and the message "Game Please call a store clerk.'' is displayed, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (``An error has occurred.'' "Please call the game store clerk." is output. Note that the manner of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112).

In step S705, it is determined whether the front door 102 is in an open state (door open), and if the door is open, other device monitoring processing is ended, and if the door is not open, step S706 Proceed to. In step S706, it is determined whether the error notification termination condition is satisfied, and if the error notification termination condition is not satisfied, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if the error notification termination condition is satisfied, the other device monitoring processing is terminated. , the process advances to step S707.

Here, the error notification termination condition is a condition that is satisfied when an error is not detected and an operation for canceling the error (in this example, an operation for turning on the reset SW) is received.

In step S707, error notification termination processing is executed. In this error notification termination process, the main control unit 300 erases the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 and sends an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error to the first sub-control unit 400. Make preparations. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of terminating the error notification being executed.

In step S708, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, other device monitoring processing is ended to continue displaying the management screen, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S709. move on. In step S709, the main control unit 300 sends a preparing screen display command to the first sub-control unit 400 to instruct the start of displaying the preparing screen (for example, see FIG. 17(A) (4)). Make preparations. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the preparation screen until the management screen can be displayed, or is capable of displaying the management screen. However, the process of displaying the preparation screen for a predetermined period of time is executed.

<Administration screen>
Next, the management screen will be explained using FIGS. 12 to 19.

Here, the management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a clerk at a game parlor to make various settings regarding the slot machine 100. For example, the management screen is a screen on which images regarding settings regarding the game machine are displayed. (menu display, etc.), or a display in which an image for the administrator is displayed (for example, setting confirmation, setting change, etc.). Although the display contents of the administrator screen are not particularly limited, in this example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIG. 12(A) (2) etc. can be displayed.

The administrator screen SD of this example includes a title display of "System Settings" indicating that the screen is for an administrator, and multiple types of menu displays. The menu display in this example includes power saving settings, time settings, error history settings, and setting history. , right key, left key) or the OK button 193b, it is possible to arbitrarily select any item on the menu display.

For example, when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the power saving mode (for example, setting the volume of the speakers 272 and 277, and simple settings such as the brightness of the LEDs and various lamps). When the time setting item is selected, the date and time can be set.

In addition, when the error history item is selected on the administrator screen SD, the history of errors that occurred in the past in the relevant gaming machine, the opening/closing history of the front door 102, the history of power on/recovery from power outage, etc. When the setting history item is selected, it is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmations. Note that the opening/closing history of the front door 102 and the setting history in the error history will be described later.

Note that the items that can be selected on the administrator screen SD are not limited to this example, and include, for example, the maximum volume that can only be set by the administrator of the game parlor, and the items that can be selected in the event of an error (for example, opening the front door 102). It may be possible to set the error sound etc. to be output, and it may also be possible to set the amount of light of LEDs and various lamps.

Next, prior to explaining the management screen SD, terms used in the subsequent drawings will be explained using FIG. 12(A).

"Power state" indicates the state of power supplied to the slot machine 100 from the outside, "power OFF" is a state in which power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, and "power ON" is a state in which power is not supplied to the slot machine 100. 100 is in a state where power is being supplied.

"Reel operating state" indicates the operating state of the reels 110 to 112, "stopped" is a state in which all of the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and "in operation" is a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped. One is a rotating state, which is synonymous with "rotating."

“Gate body closed state/gate body open state” indicates the state of the front door 102, “gate body closed state” is a state where the front door 102 is closed, and “gate body open state” is a state where the front door 102 is closed. The door 102 is in an open state. In addition, "closed detection state/open detection state" indicates the state of the open/close sensor, and "closed detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is closed, or a state in which the front door 102 is open. This state is a state in which the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly set to a closed detection state by a predetermined operation, and the "open detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is in an open state. It is.

"Non-inserted state/inserted state" indicates whether or not medals have been inserted, "non-inserted state" is a state in which no medals have been inserted, and "inserted state" is a state in which medals have been inserted. state, or a replay state due to replay winnings. In addition, "error detection state" indicates whether an error is detected, "error non-detection state" is a state in which no error is detected, and "error detection state" is a state in which a certain error is detected. It is in a state of being

"Setting key SW" indicates the state of the setting key SW, "ON" means that the setting key SW is on, and "OFF" means that the setting key SW is off. "Reset SW" indicates the state of the reset SW, "ON" is the state where the reset SW is ON, and "OFF" is the state where the reset SW is OFF.

"Start lever" indicates the state of the start lever 135, "ON" means that the start lever 135 is on, and "OFF" means that the start lever 135 is off. "Stop button" indicates the state of the stop buttons 137 to 139, "non-operated" is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated, and "stop operation" is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated. It is in a state of "Cross button" indicates the state of the cross button 193, "non-operation" is a state in which the cross button 193 is not operated, and "specific operation" is a state in which the cross button 193 is operated.

"Light-emitting body" indicates the operating state of the light-emitting means (in this example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), and "off" means that the light-emitting means is turned off. The "open light emitting mode" is a state in which the light emitting means emits light in the open light emitting mode indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state, and the "stop light emitting mode" is a state in which the light emitting means emits light in an open light emitting mode indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state. 112 is in a state in which the light emitting means emits light in a stop light emitting mode indicating that the light emitting device 112 is stopped.

"Output sound" indicates the operating state of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277 in this example), "non-output" is a state in which no sound is output from the sound output means, and "setting change sound" is a state in which the sound output means is outputting a setting change sound indicating that the settings are being changed, and the "open sound" is a state in which the sound output means outputs a setting change sound indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state. This is a state in which sound is being output, and the "stop BGM" is a state in which the sound output means is outputting stop BGM indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Further, “display example” indicates an example of display content displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Settings change mode>
Next, the setting change mode will be explained using FIG. 12(A). FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the flow of the setting change mode in chronological order.

<Setting change mode/Turn on setting key SW with power OFF>
In the state shown in FIG. 12(A)(1), the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON by the administrator of the game parlor when the power supply is OFF, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed and the setting key SW has been turned on.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) do not output sound, and the display means (liquid crystal display 157) is hidden.

<Settings change mode/Starting settings change mode, displaying the management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A)(2) is when the setting key SW is ON, as described using FIG. 12(A)(1), and the game parlor manager operates the power switch. This is a state in which the power state has changed from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that when the power is turned on while the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON, the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode). In this state, the setting value is changed to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 12A (2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state, an operation (certain operation) of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. When this is performed, the display of the management screen (management display) can be started.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 determines that the front door 102 is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON in steps S203 to S204 of the initial setting process described using FIG. However, in this example, since the front door 102 is in an open state and the setting key SW is ON, the setting changing process is started.

Subsequently, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing settings to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Next, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a, but in this example, since the current setting value is setting 6, As shown in FIG. 12(A)(2), the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

<Setting change mode/change of setting values>
The state shown in FIG. 12A (3) is a state in which the reset SW is operated once by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

In steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the currently set setting values 1 to 6 and updates them by 1 each time an operation of the reset SW is detected. When the value exceeds 6, the setting value is changed by repeatedly returning it to 1. In this example, since one reset SW operation was detected, the setting value is changed as shown in Fig. 12 (A) (3). , the number 1 indicating setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a.

<Setting change mode/confirmation of setting values>
The state shown in FIG. 12(A) (4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, the main control unit 300 changes the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a to a new value in subsequent steps S308 to S309. The set value is stored (confirmed) as a set value, and the display on the set value display device 101a is erased to hide the set value. However, in this example, since the operation of the start lever 135 is detected, As shown in (4), the display on the set value display device 101a is erased.

<Setting change mode/Exiting setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12A (5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the gaming parlor in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S310 of the setting change process that the setting key SW is OFF, it transmits a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to be ended. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change termination command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12A (5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a performance to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal performance.

<Settings confirmation mode>
Next, the setting confirmation mode will be explained using FIG. 12(B). FIG. 12(B) is a diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Settings confirmation mode/Front door: Door body closed state>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B) (1) is a state in which the power supply is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the stopped effect is being executed.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light mode, and the stop BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), a stop effect is displayed.

<Setting confirmation mode/Front door: Door body closed state → Door body open state)>
The state shown in FIG. 12(B)(2) is the state in which the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 changes from the door closed state to the door closed state described using FIG. 12(B)(1). It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an open sound. In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the effect continues during the stoppage.

<Settings confirmation mode/Power ON, front door (door open) and setting key SW ON>
The state shown in FIG. 12 (B) (3) is the state shown in FIG. The user performs an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is in an ON state.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that when the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON while the power is on, the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Then, in the same state, a transition is made to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state). When an operation (certain operation) is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In this example, the setting value confirmation valid period is valid, the setting key SW is ON, and the current setting value is setting 6, so the number 6 indicating setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. do.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(3), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Settings confirmation mode/Exiting settings confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 12B (4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 sends a setting confirmation end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting confirmation is to be ended. However, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 12(B)(4), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a performance to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal performance.

<Display example 1 of management screen>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 13(A). FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 13(A)(1) to FIG. 13(A)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode explained using FIG. 12(B)(1) to FIG. 12(B)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (certain operation) is performed by the administrator of the game parlor to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON. , the display of the management screen SD has started.

In order to avoid redundant explanation, a detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted, but in the state shown in FIGS. 13(A)(1) to 13(A)(2), the front door 102 is opened. In addition to (or instead of) executing the stopped effect in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), an open notification (for example, (The same applies to other embodiments).

<Display example 1 of management screen/Opening/closing sensor: Open detection state → Closed detection state>
The state shown in FIG. 13A (4) is a state in which the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is forced into the closed detection state by a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode.

In the slot machine 100, even if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, the management screen SD (management display) is displayed. It is configured to continue displaying the screen SD (management display).

More specifically, in steps S601 and S606 of the setting value confirmation process described using FIG. The process ends and the setting confirmation mode continues, but in this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, the management screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 13(A)(4). Continue displaying SD.

In the state shown in FIG. 13A (4), the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is the closed detection state, the light emitters (various (lamp 420, etc.) is turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that was outputting the opening sound is set to non-output.

Note that the light-emitting body to be turned off may be in a state where all of the various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are turned off, or one or more of the various lamps 420 may be turned off. It may be one that is turned off.

<Display example 1 of management screen/Exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 13A (5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the gaming parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process described using FIG. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13(A)(5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a performance to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal performance.

<Display example 1 of the management screen/Turn on the setting key SW with the open/close sensor (closed detection state)>
The state shown in FIG. 13(A)(6) is that when the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, an operation to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a certain operation) ) has been performed and the setting key SW is turned on.

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the closed detection state, an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON. The configuration is such that display of the management screen SD (management display) cannot be started even if the management screen SD (management display) is opened.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In this example, since the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state and the set value confirmation valid period is not over, the set value confirmation process is ended and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed, so the set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a. will not be displayed. Furthermore, since the process in step S605 is not executed, a setting confirmation start command indicating that setting confirmation is to be started is not sent to the first sub-control unit 400, so that the display is not displayed as shown in FIG. 13(A)(6). In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the stopped performance is continued.

<Confirmation operation>
Next, a confirmation operation that can be executed by the slot machine 100 will be explained.

Here, the confirmation operation means that the confirmation operation means of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500) performs one of the plurality of presentation means. By operating a presentation means (one or more presentation means) based on a certain predetermined operation pattern, it is possible to determine whether a certain presentation means is operating based on a certain operation pattern (if there is an abnormality). This is the work of checking (inspecting) whether or not there are any.

<Confirmation operation/direction means (display means)>
The slot machine 100 is equipped with display means capable of displaying information as one of the presentation means. Examples of display means included in the slot machine 100 include the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 described using FIG. 1, the payout number display 127, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, Examples include LEDs.

When a display means is adopted as a presentation means, a certain operation pattern may be, for example, an operation pattern in which the entire display area of the display means is filled with one or more colors, or a pattern in which the display means is displayed and hidden at a certain time interval. An operation pattern that repeats, an operation pattern that lights up LED segments in a certain order, an operation pattern that makes the LED blink, an operation pattern that changes the color of a display means, an operation pattern that displays in a certain order when there are multiple display means. , an operation pattern for displaying only some of the display means when there are a plurality of display means, and the like.

<Confirmation operation/direction means (sound output means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a sound output means capable of outputting sound as one of the performance means. Examples of sound output means included in the slot machine 100 include the speakers 272 and 277 described using FIG. 2.

When a sound output means is adopted as the production means, the certain operation pattern may be, for example, an operation pattern that causes the sound output means to output a certain sound, an operation pattern that changes the volume or frequency of the sound output from the sound output means, An operation pattern for stopping (silencing) the output of sound from a sound output means, an operation pattern for outputting sound in a certain order when there are multiple sound output means, and a partial sound output when there are multiple sound output means Examples include an operation pattern in which only the means outputs sound.

<Confirmation operation/direction means (light emitting means)>
The slot machine 100 includes a light emitting means capable of emitting (outputting) light as one of the presentation means. The light emitting means provided in the slot machine 100 includes, for example, the upper lamp 142, the side lamp 144, the reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112, the production button 192, the stop buttons 137 to 139, and the start lever 135 described using FIG. In this example, both light emitting means are composed of LEDs.

When a light-emitting means is adopted as a production means, a certain operation pattern may include, for example, an operation pattern in which one, a plurality, or all of the LEDs constituting one or more light-emitting means are lit in a certain order. Or an operation pattern in which one, a plurality, or all of the LEDs constituting a plurality of light-emitting means flash, an operation pattern in which the color of one or more light-emitting means is changed, or a pattern in which the LEDs emit light in a certain order when there are multiple light-emitting means. Examples include an operation pattern that causes a device to emit light, an operation pattern that repeats emitting and extinguishing light in a single color for all the light emitting devices when there are multiple light emitting devices, and an operation pattern that causes only some of the light emitting devices to emit light when there are multiple light emitting devices, etc. .

<Confirmation operation/direction means (movable means)>
The slot machine 100 includes movable means as one of the presentation means. Examples of movable means included in the slot machine 100 include the reels 110 to 112 and the shutter (shielding device) 163 described using FIG. 1, as well as accessories.

When a movable means is adopted as a production means, a certain movement pattern may be, for example, a movement in which the movable means moves in a predetermined movement (for example, one, more than one, or all of vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, and vertical movement). an operation pattern in which the movable means is operated in a random movement (e.g., one, more than one, or all of vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement), a movement pattern in which the movable means is moved to a certain position (e.g., an initial position Examples include an operation pattern for moving the robot to an upper limit position, a lower limit position, etc.

<Confirmation operation/Start of confirmation operation>
In this example, when the management display SD (for example, the management display SD shown in FIG. 15A (4)) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a is pressed. By operating it, you can arbitrarily select items such as "power saving settings", "time settings", "error/setting history", and "LED operation check", and the "LED operation check" item can be selected. When selected, a confirmation operation of the light emitting means is started.

Note that the conditions for starting the operation check of the production means are not limited to this example; for example, the start condition may be started in connection with turning on the power or a reset operation, or the start condition may be started when an operation by a certain operation means is received. Alternatively, it may start when a predetermined display (for example, a confirmation operation screen for the production means) is displayed on the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157), or it may start when the predetermined display (for example, the production means confirmation operation screen) is displayed. It may be started when a predetermined time has elapsed after the confirmation operation screen for the means is displayed, or one, more, or all of the confirmation operations for multiple production means may be automatically performed at predetermined intervals. It may be started by switching, or it may be started by randomly switching one, a plurality, or all of the confirmation operations of the plurality of presentation means.

In addition, the confirmation operation items on the management display are not limited to "LED operation check" corresponding to the confirmation operation of the light emitting means, but for example, "display check" corresponding to the confirmation operation of the display means, confirmation of the sound output means It may include one, more than one, or all of "speaker operation check" corresponding to the operation, "movable body operation check" corresponding to the confirmation operation of the movable means, etc.

Further, the confirmation operation of the presentation means may be something that can be executed only when the door body (front door 102) is in the closed state. For example, when a light emitting means is adopted as the presentation means, the confirmation operation of the light emitting means may be performed. Priority may be given to the door opening notification using the light emitting means. Further, the confirmation operation of the presentation means may be something that can be executed regardless of the state of the door body (front door 102). For example, when a light emitting means is adopted as the presentation means, the confirmation operation of the presentation means may be performed by the door open notification by the light emitting means. Also, priority may be given to the confirmation operation of the light emitting means. Further, the confirmation operation of the presentation means may be performed only for some presentation means when the door body (front door 102) is in an open state. For example, when a light emitting means is adopted as the presentation means. , the door open notification may be executed by some of the light emitting means, and the confirmation operation may be executed by the remaining light emitting means.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and a front surface of the gaming machine. A door body that is provided and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the opening/closing sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a certain operation (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). , a first operation means (e.g., setting key SW) capable of turning the OFF to ON operation by rotating the reel, and a plurality of reels that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., as shown in FIG. 1). A game comprising: reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the open state. , is a means that can change the detection state to an open detection state, and is a means by which a predetermined operation regarding the detection means (for example, a light shielding piece of a certain length is installed between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101). is configured so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state, by inserting the door body and fixing it with tape etc. The means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). ) is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed, and when the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating. Even if the operation is performed, the management display is configured not to start being displayed, and in the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the state where the certain operation is performed, When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by a stop button, the display of the management display is started; Even if the certain operation is performed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the display of the management display cannot be started; Even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the state where the management display is displayed, the display of the management display (for example, FIG. 13(A)) This gaming machine is characterized by continuing the management screen SD) shown in 4).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state. In addition, security can be improved by preventing the management display from being checked even if, for example, a fraudster performs a predetermined operation and opens the door with the detection state of the detection means set to the closed detection state. can be achieved. Furthermore, by continuing to display the management display even if the door open sensor is in the closed detection state after the management display has been displayed, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the game store staff. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 ( upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.); a door body provided at the front of the gaming machine that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1); A detection means capable of detecting the state (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW ), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of patterns and are driven to rotate, and a reel provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to control the rotation of the reels. A game machine is provided with a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the game machine, and the detection means detects that when the door body is in the closed state, the detection state is the closed detection state. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and the detection means , inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape etc.), the door body is in the open state. The detection state of the detection means is configured to be in the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and when the door body is in the open state. and when the certain operation is performed while the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the display of the management display can be started. , in the first state in which the reels are rotating, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display is not started; , while the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to move in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)). ), the control display is configured to start displaying the management display, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the certain operation is configured such that display of the management display cannot be started even if the management display is displayed, and the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state in a state where the management display is displayed. 13(A) (4)), and the light emitting means continues to display the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. When the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(2)), the light emission means can emit light in a first light emission mode (for example, the open light emission mode), and the light emission means , when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(3)), light emission is possible in the first light emission mode; , the light emitting means is in a second light emitting mode (for example, when the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A) (5)) when the game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the state shown in FIG. 13(A) (5). The light emitting means can emit light in a stopped light emitting mode and a gaming light emitting mode), and the light emitting means can emit light when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detecting means is the closed detection state (for example, FIG. 13(A) The gaming machine is characterized in that the light is turned off in the state shown in (4).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if a fraudster performs a predetermined operation and opens the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Furthermore, by continuing to display the management display even if the door open sensor is in the closed detection state after the management display has been displayed, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the game store staff. It becomes possible.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state. When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the state where the game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, it is possible to emit light in the second light emission state, and the detection means When the detection state is in the closed detection state, the light emitting means is turned off while the management display continues to be displayed, so even if you forget to turn off the management display, it is easy to recognize even from a distance, and the management display It is possible to reliably know by the light-emitting means that the detection state of the detection means has become the closed detection state while the display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator, such as by preventing forgetting to turn off the management display. can.

Note that the sound output means is provided with a sound output means, and the sound output means is capable of outputting an opening sound when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the light emitting means is capable of outputting an opening sound. The opening sound may be stopped when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closure detection state.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 ( upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.); a door body provided at the front of the gaming machine that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1); A detection means capable of detecting the state (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW ), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, a second operating means (for example, the cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1), A predetermined confirmation operation for the light emitting means (for example, an operation of lighting one, a plurality, or all of the LEDs constituting one or more light emitting means in a certain order, one or more light emitting means The operation of blinking one, more than one, or all of the LEDs constituting the LED, the operation of changing the color of one or more light emitting means, the operation of causing the light emitting means to emit light in a certain order when there are multiple light emitting means, the operation of emitting light. Confirmation operation means (for example, main control unit 300, a first sub-control unit 400), and the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, The detection means is a means that can change the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and is capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. By inserting a light-shielding piece of a certain length between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section and fixing it with tape or the like, the detection state of the detection means remains as described above even when the door body is in the open state. The display means is configured to be in a closed detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is When the certain operation is performed in the open detection state, the display of the management display can be started, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. is configured such that display of the management display cannot be started even if the certain operation is performed, and in a state where the management display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means is set to the open detection state. Even if the state changes to the closed detection state, the management display continues to be displayed (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, the light emission means is capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode (for example, the open light emission mode), and the light emission means is capable of emitting light while displaying the management display. The detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, and the light emission mode is capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode; state, the light emitting means can emit light in a second light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting mode during stop, a light emitting mode during a game), and the light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a second light emitting mode (e.g., a light emitting mode during stop, a light emitting mode during a game), and the light emitting means is in a state where the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is In the closure detection state, the light goes out, and the confirmation operation means performs an operation on the second operation means (for example, a cross key) when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is in the closure detection state. 193a, when an operation of selecting an item "LED operation check" in a menu display of a management display is performed, the confirmation operation for the light emitting means can be executed. be.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if a fraudster performs a predetermined operation and opens the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Furthermore, by continuing to display the management display even if the door open sensor is in the closed detection state after the management display has been displayed, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the game store staff. It becomes possible.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state. When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the state where the game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, it is possible to emit light in the second light emission state, and the detection means When the detection state is in the closed detection state, the light emitting means is turned off while the management display continues to be displayed, so even if you forget to turn off the management display, it is easy to recognize even from a distance, and the management display It is possible to reliably know by the light-emitting means that the detection state of the detection means has become the closed detection state while the display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator, such as by preventing forgetting to turn off the management display. can.

In addition, when the management display is on and the door is closed, the light emitting means is off, so if the light emitting means is malfunctioning, it would be difficult to notice. By being able to perform the checking operation of the means, it is possible to easily notice a malfunction of the light emitting means.

Further, the second operating means is constituted by a plurality of operating means (for example, a cross key 193a (up button, down button, right button, left button), OK button 193b), and the second operating means The operation for is an operation using at least some of the plurality of operation means (for example, an operation of selecting the "LED operation check" item in the menu display of the management display using the cross key 193a). It may be.

Note that in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are moved to a second stop state (for example, a replay winning combination) by the stop button. (symbol combination corresponding to replay)), the display of the management display may not be started.

With this configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, if they stop in the second stopping mode (replay stopping mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it will be determined that gaming is in progress and the management display will be displayed. By disabling the display from starting, security can be improved.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 2 of management screen>
Next, display example 2 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 13(B). FIG. 13(B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 13(B)(1) to FIG. 13(B)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode explained using FIG. 12(B)(1) to FIG. 12(B)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (certain operation) is performed by the administrator of the game parlor to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON. , the display of the management screen SD has started. In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Display example 2 of management screen/Power status: Power ON → Power OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13 (B) (4) is when the power state shown in FIG. This is the state where the power has changed from ON to OFF.

In this state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) do not output sound, and the display means (liquid crystal display 157) is hidden.

<Display example 2 of management screen/Setting key SW: ON → OFF>
The state shown in FIG. 13 (B) (5) is the state shown in FIG. The setting key SW is in the OFF state after the operation to turn it OFF has been performed.

In the same state, the power supply state is OFF, so the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) do not output sound, and the display means (liquid crystal display 157) ) are hidden.

<Display example 2 of management screen/Power status: Power OFF → Power ON>
The state shown in FIG. 13 (B) (6) is when the power state shown in FIG. This is the state where the power has changed from OFF to ON.

In the slot machine 100, the power is turned off while the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, and then the setting key SW is turned from ON to OFF (a certain operation is canceled), and the power is turned on. , the management display is configured to start displaying without performing the certain operation.

More specifically, in step S205 of the main control unit initialization process described using FIG. In a state where no command is being sent, determine whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, send a setting confirmation start command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that setting confirmation is to be started. do.

When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, it executes processing to start displaying the management screen. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 13(B)(6), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and a front surface of the gaming machine. A door body that is provided and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the opening/closing sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a certain operation (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). , a first operation means (e.g., setting key SW) capable of turning the OFF to ON operation by rotating the reel, and a plurality of reels that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., as shown in FIG. 1). A game comprising: reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the open state. , the detection state is a means capable of changing to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is a means capable of changing to the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. In the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the certain operation, the management display is configured not to start displaying even if the certain operation is performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button while the reels are being played, the management display starts to be displayed. In a state where the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(B)(3)) is displayed, the certain operation is canceled after the power is turned off. , when the power is turned on, the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(B)(6)) starts to be displayed without performing the certain operation. It's a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state. In addition, if the management display has not been correctly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, thereby making it possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for game store staff.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 ( upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.); a door body provided at the front of the gaming machine that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1); A detection means capable of detecting the state (for example, an open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, a setting key SW ), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are decorated with a plurality of types of patterns and are driven to rotate, and a reel provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to control the rotation of the reels. A game machine is provided with a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the game machine, and the detection means detects that when the door body is in the closed state, the detection state is the closed detection state. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. The means is capable of displaying a management display, and when the certain operation is performed when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the management display is displayed. The management display is configured to be able to start displaying, and configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating. In the first state, in the state in which the reels are rotating, and in the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to move to a first stop state (for example, a small When the system is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination (bell), the control display is started to be displayed, and while the control display is displayed, after the power is turned off, When the certain operation is canceled and the power is turned on, the management display starts to be displayed even if the certain operation is not performed, and the light emitting means is in a state where the game is possible and the detecting means is in a state where the game is possible. is capable of emitting light in a first light emitting mode (e.g., open light emitting mode) when the detection state of the light emitting means is in the open detection state, and the light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a first light emitting mode (for example, an open light emitting mode), and the light emitting means is in the detection state of the detection means when the management display is being displayed. In the open detection state, the light emitting means can emit light in the first light emitting mode, and when the detection state of the detection means is in the state where a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the light emitting means can emit light in the second light emitting mode ( For example, the light emitting means can emit light in a stopped light emitting mode and a gaming light emitting mode), and the light emitting means is turned off when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. This is a game machine that features:

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state.

In addition, if the management display has not been correctly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, thereby making it possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for game store staff.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state. When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the state where the game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, it is possible to emit light in the second light emission state, and the detection means In order to turn off the light emitting means while continuing to display the management display when the detection state of the control display is in the closed detection state, the light emitting means ensures that the detection state of the detection means has become the closed detection state while the management display is displayed. This can improve the convenience of the administrator, such as preventing forgetting to turn off the management display.

Note that the sound output means (for example, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2) is provided, and the sound output means is configured such that when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, ( The light-emitting means is capable of outputting an opening sound (for example, a sound saying "The door is open") that notifies that the door body is in an open state, and the light-emitting means is configured to output a sound when the management display is being displayed and The opening sound may be stopped when the detection state of the detection means is the closure detection state.

Note that in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are moved to a second stop state (for example, a replay winning combination) by the stop button. (symbol combination corresponding to replay)), the display of the management display may not be started.

With this configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, if they stop in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it will be determined that gaming is in progress and the management display will be displayed. Security can be improved by preventing the display from starting.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 3 of management screen>
Next, display example 3 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 14(A). FIG. 14A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Display example 3 of management screen/Reel operating status: In operation>
The state shown in FIG. 14A (1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). state).

In the same state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light-emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a light-emitting mode during play, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output BGM during play, and are displayed. In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), effects during the game are displayed.

<Display example 3 of management screen/Front door: Door body closed state → Door body open state>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(2) is the state in which the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 changes from the door closed state to the door closed state described using FIG. 14(A)(1). It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an open sound. In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the performance during the game is continued.

<Display example 3 of the management screen/Turn on the setting key SW while the reels are rotating>
The state shown in FIG. 14 (A) (3) is when the reel operation state shown in FIG. The administrator performs an operation (a certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is now turned ON.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the state does not change to a state where the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), and the management screen (management display) does not change. Configured not to start displaying.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In this example, since one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not over, the set value confirmation process is ended and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed, so the set value display device Setting values are not displayed in 101a. Furthermore, since the process in step S605 is not executed, a setting confirmation start command indicating that setting confirmation is to be started is not sent to the first sub-control unit 400, so that the display is not displayed as shown in FIG. In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the performance during the game is continued.

<Display example 3 of management screen/Reel operating status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 14 (A) (4) is when the reel operation state shown in FIG. A third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. In addition to displaying the combination (in this example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell"), a small winning combination is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), as shown in FIG. 14(A)(4). A prize notification display ND1 (in this example, an image of a bell symbol and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a prize has been won (bell) is displayed.

Note that in the state shown in FIG. 14A (4), the front door 102 is in an open state, so the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speaker 272 , 277), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a winning notification mode that suggests that the winning combination has been won, and the sound is output. The means (speakers 272, 277) may output a winning notification sound indicating that the winning combination has been won (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Display example 3 of management screen/Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 14(A)(5) is a state in which the display of the management screen SD is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described using FIG. 14(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and While an operation (certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set to the first stop state (in this example, by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button)). When the game is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell), a management screen SD (management display) is started to be displayed.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In this example, since it is the set value confirmation valid period and the setting key SW is ON, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 14(A)(5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and a front surface of the gaming machine. A door body that is provided and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the opening/closing sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a certain operation (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). , a first operation means (e.g., setting key SW) capable of turning the OFF to ON operation by rotating the reel, and a plurality of reels that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., as shown in FIG. 1). A game comprising: reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the open state. , the detection state is a means capable of changing to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is a means capable of changing to the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. In the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the certain operation, the management display is configured not to start displaying even if the certain operation is performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button while the reels are being played, the management display (for example, a figure This gaming machine is configured to start displaying the management screen SD) shown in 14(A)(5).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and a sound output means (for example, the sound output means shown in FIG. 2). speakers 272, 277 shown), a door provided on the front of the gaming machine that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), and a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, the 1), a first operation means (e.g., setting key SW) that can perform a certain operation (e.g., turning it from OFF to ON by rotating it), and a second operation means (e.g., A cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1), a third operating means (e.g., volume adjustment SW for administrator), and a plurality of reels (e.g., the reel shown in FIG. 1) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate 110 to 112), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the open state. The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is a means capable of changing the state to the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as " When the certain operation is performed in the first state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), the display of the management display can be started, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. is configured such that the display of the management display does not start even if the certain operation is performed, and the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the state where the certain operation is performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button, the management display (for example, FIG. 14 ( A) It is configured to start displaying the management screen SD shown in (5), and the second operation means is configured to start displaying the management screen SD) shown in (5), and the second operating means is configured to control whether the door body is in the open state or the closed state. is a means provided at an operable position, and is configured to be able to change the volume of the sound output from the sound output means when the second operation means is operated. While the management display is being displayed, the display means can display the management display and the volume value display (for example, the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)). The volume is configured such that the volume cannot be changed by operation using the second operating means, and the third operating means is a means provided at a position where it can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, The game machine is characterized in that the volume can be changed even when the management display is displayed when an operation is performed using the third operation means.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state.

Further, even while the management display is being displayed, the operation of the volume value display can be checked, thereby increasing convenience for the game parlor manager.

In addition, while the management display is displayed, the management display and the volume value display can be displayed, but it is possible to display the management display and the volume value display, but it is possible to display the management display and the volume value display. If the volume cannot be adjusted by operating the second operating means, but the third operating means, which is located at a position that can be operated only when the door body is open, is operated, the volume cannot be adjusted. Therefore, if the administrator needs to display the management display for some reason while the player is playing, the player or administrator may accidentally perform an operation using the second operation means. In addition to not having to worry about the set volume being changed, the set volume can be visually checked at any time by the user's own operations, and administrators can change the volume according to the situation. Yes, it is very convenient.

Note that the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

It also includes a sound output means (for example, the speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2) and a second operation means (for example, the cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1), and the second operation means can be operated. The display means is configured to be able to change the volume output from the sound output means when the second operation means is operated, and the display means displays the volume value when the second operation means is operated. For example, the means can display the volume value display VD2) shown in FIG. 19(B)(2), and while the management display is being displayed, the display means can display the volume value display, It may be configured such that the volume output from the sound output means cannot be changed even if the second operation means is operated (for example, see FIG. 19(B)(3)).

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the volume value display even while the management display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve convenience for the manager of the game parlor.

Further, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated whether the door body is in the open state or the closed state.

With such a configuration, not only the game parlor manager but also the players can adjust the volume, and the convenience for the players can be improved.

<Display example 4 of management screen>
Next, display example 4 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 14(B). FIG. 14(B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 14(B)(1) to FIG. 14(B)(3) are the same states as the setting confirmation mode explained using FIG. 14(A)(1) to FIG. 14(A)(3). When the power supply state is ON, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, an operation (certain operation) is performed by the administrator of the game parlor to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON. However, since the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (the reel operating state is in operation), the management screen SD is not displayed. In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Display example 4 of management screen/Reel operation status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 14 (B) (4) is when the reel operation state shown in FIG. A third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed, so although not shown, the symbol display window 113 corresponds to the replay combination (replay). The symbol combination to be played (in this example, the symbol combination "Replay-Replay-Replay") is displayed, and the state shifts to the replay state, and as shown in FIG. 14(B)(4), the display means (liquid crystal In the display area of the display device 157), a winning notification display ND2 (in this example, a display of an image of a replay symbol and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a replay winning combination (replay) has been won is displayed. are doing.

<Display example 4 of the management screen/Hide the management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 14(B)(5) is the state after winning the replay combination (replay) described using FIG. 14(A)(4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and While an operation (certain operation) is being performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons) cause the plurality of reels 110 to 112 to move to the second stop mode (in this example, When the game is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (replay), the management screen SD (management display) is configured not to start displaying.
More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In this example, since it is a replay state (MAX bet state) due to replay and it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation process is ended and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed, so the set value display device Setting values are not displayed in 101a. Furthermore, since the process in step S605 is not executed, a setting confirmation start command indicating that setting confirmation is to be started is not sent to the first sub-control unit 400, so that the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is As shown in 14(B)(5), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the performance during the game is continued.

According to this example, in the first state (the front door 102 is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor is the open detection state), the state in which the reel is rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed. , when the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination) by the stop button, the management display is configured not to start being displayed. Therefore, even if the reels are stopped, if they stop in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (max bet state), it will be judged that the game is in progress and the management display will not start displaying. By doing so, security can be improved.

<Display example 5 of management screen>
Next, display example 5 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 15(A). FIG. 15A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 5 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Display example 5 of management screen/door closed, medal inserted>
In the state shown in FIG. 15A (1), when the setting key SW is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, the background image is displayed when a medal is inserted. has started.

In this state, since medals have been inserted, a background image (in this example, a video of the Tono character walking at night) is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). Since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitting means (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop mode (for example, a mode different from the open light mode and the light emission mode when winning a prize, which will be described later).

<Display example 5 of management screen/door open, start lever ON>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) is the state in which the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 is in the door closed state and the medal inserted state described using FIG. 15(A)(1). This is a state in which the door body changes from the closed state to the open state, and the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the game parlor or the like.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitting means (various lamps 420, etc.) are emitted in an open light emission mode to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (e.g. , the upper lamp 142 and the side lamp 144 flash), and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) make an opening sound to notify that the front door 102 is in the open state (in this example, the door is open). outputs a voice saying "

In addition, in the same state, since the start lever 135 has been operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and a game effect (in this example, A voice performance (in this example, a dialogue performance consisting of a plurality of lines uttered by a character such as a character such as ``Yoji'') is started, and a sound (in this example, a dialogue performance) corresponding to the game performance (in this example, a dialogue performance) is started from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). , dialogue production SE).

<Display example 5 of management screen/Reel stop (bell winning)>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(3) is when the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor or the like while the reel operation state shown in FIG. 15(A)(2) is in operation. The reels 110 to 112 have stopped and a bell has been won.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. In addition to displaying the combination (the first stopping mode; in this example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell"), a game effect (in this example, a dialogue effect) is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). ) to continue.

In addition, in this state, since a small prize (bell) has been won and the front door 102 is in the open state, some of the light emitting means emit light in an open light mode (for example, the upper lamp 142 or the side lamp 144 (blinking)), and the other part of the light emitting means (for example, the reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112) is changed to a bell light emission mode (for example, yellow) to notify that a small winning combination (bell) has been won. ) to emit light. In addition, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") and a sound (in this example, a sound corresponding to a game performance (in this example, a dialogue performance)). , dialogue audio) is continuously outputted, and a sound (in this example, winning sound) notifying that a small winning combination (bell) has been won is outputted.

<Display example 5 of management screen/Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the management screen SD is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described using FIG. 15(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are in the open state. is rotating and a certain operation is being performed (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON), the stop button (in this example, stop buttons 137 to 139) is pressed. When the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stopping mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)), the management display (in this example, the management screen SD) is displayed. Configured to start.

In the state shown in FIG. 15A (4), the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. When the setting key SW is turned on from OFF to ON (certain operation), the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are brought to the first stop by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button). Since this is the state immediately after being stopped in the pattern (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (bell)), the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is displayed as shown in FIG. 15(A)(4). The management screen SD is displayed in the display area.

In this example, when the management screen SD is displayed, by operating the cross key 193b or the OK button 193a, you can select "power saving settings", "time settings", "error/setting history", and "LED operation". It is possible to arbitrarily select items such as "CHECK", and when the item "CHECK LED OPERATION" is selected, a confirmation operation of the light emitting means is started.

Further, in the slot machine 100 of this example, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 - 112 is rotating and a certain operation (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON) is performed, the stop button (in this example, stop buttons 137 to 139) is pressed. When the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (bell)), the management display (in this example, the management screen SD) is displayed. In some cases, the winning performance may be ended before the start of the game, and the game performance may be interrupted when the management display starts to be displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 15(A)(4), the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. When a certain operation is being performed (in this example, an operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON), the plurality of reels 110 are pressed by the stop button (in this example, stop buttons 137 to 139). Since ~112 was stopped in the first stopping mode (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role (bell)), before starting the display of the management display (in this example, the management screen SD) The winning effect (in this example, the winning effect in the form of a bell light emission by the light emitting means (reel backlights of each reel 110 to 112) and the winning sound by the sound output means (speakers 272, 277)) is terminated, and the management display is Along with the start of the display, the game performance (in this example, the dialogue performance by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) and the dialogue sound by the sound output means (speakers 272, 277)) is interrupted.

According to this example, when transitioning to the management display after the reels are stopped, a winning effect that suggests (informs) a winning combination that is of high interest (high importance) to the player is displayed before transitioning to the management display. By terminating it (by not terminating it midway), it becomes easier to recognize the winning presentation, and even if it irregularly shifts to the management display, it is possible to correctly recognize the winning combination.

Note that the "first stopping mode" according to the present invention is not limited to symbol combinations corresponding to the small winning combination (bell), but is also symbol combinations corresponding to other winning winning combinations such as watermelon, cherry, etc. It may also be a specific symbol combination that does not correspond to a winning combination.

In addition, although an example has been shown in which the "gaming production" is interrupted when the display of the management display starts, it may be interrupted always when the display of the management display starts, or it may be interrupted when the display of the management display starts. If the game performance is executable, it may interrupt one, more than one, or all of the multiple types of game performance, or it may interrupt at least part of the game performance. Alternatively, it may interrupt one, more than one, or all of the following: a display using display means, a light emitting means, a sound output means, a movable means, etc. It may be configured such that a performance whose duration is longer than a predetermined time is interrupted, and a performance whose duration is shorter than a predetermined time is not interrupted.

In addition, although an example has been shown in which the "winning presentation" ends before displaying the management display, it may always end before displaying the management display, or multiple types of winning presentations may be performed. If it is possible to do so, one, more than one, or all of the winning performances may be terminated, or at least a portion of the winning performances may be terminated. , a performance using a display means, a performance using a light emitting means, a performance using a sound output means, a performance using a movable means, etc. It may be one that ends one, more than one, or all of them, and the performance time It may be configured such that if the performance time is longer than a predetermined time, the performance ends, and if the performance time is shorter than the predetermined time, the performance does not end.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has the presentation means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 2, 277, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.), and a door body that is provided on the front of the game machine and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). , a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation means (for example, a setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and a reel provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels. A game machine is provided with a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the rotation of etc., dialogue production by display means (liquid crystal display device 157), dialogue audio by sound output means (speakers 272, 277), production that starts with the rotation of the reels, and backgrounds in which characters are walking across multiple games. The performance means can execute a winning performance (for example, a winning performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 15A) according to the stop state of the plurality of reels). 3) etc., it is possible to execute a winning effect in a bell lighting mode using a light emitting means (reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112) and a winning sound using a sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the detecting means , when the door body is in the closed state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the detection means is capable of changing the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state. It is a means that can perform predetermined operations regarding the detection means (for example, inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape etc. operation), the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state, and the presentation means is configured to display a display means (for example, a 1, the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the above-mentioned state. Open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). ) is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed, and when the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating. Even if the operation is performed, the display of the management display is not started, and in the first state and the state where the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button, the display of the management display is started, When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the stop button in the first state and the state where the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, This game machine is characterized in that the entry prize performance is ended before the display of the management display is started, and the game performance may be interrupted with the start of the display of the management display.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if a fraudster performs a predetermined operation and opens the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Furthermore, by continuing to display the management display even if the door open sensor is in the closed detection state after the management display has been displayed, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the game store staff. It becomes possible.

In addition, when transitioning to the management display after the reels stop, the winning effects that suggest (notify) winning combinations that are of high interest (high importance) to the player can be terminated before transitioning to the management display. (By not ending it midway), it becomes easier to recognize the winning presentation, and even if the display shifts irregularly to the management display, the winning combination can be correctly recognized.

Further, even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the management display is displayed, the display of the management display (for example, in FIG. 13 (A) The management screen SD shown in (4)) is configured to continue, and the presentation means includes light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 (lamp, etc.)), and the light emitting means is in a state in which a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(2)). The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in one light emitting mode (e.g., open light emitting mode), and the light emitting means is in the displaying of the management display and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state (e.g., FIG. ) In the state shown in (3)), the light emitting means can emit light in the first light emitting mode, and the light emitting means is in a state where a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state (for example, in the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(5)), the light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a second light emitting mode (e.g., light emitting mode while stopped, light emitting mode during play), and the light emitting means is capable of emitting light while displaying the management display. The detection state of the detection means may be such that the light is turned off in the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4)).

With such a configuration, the light emitting means is in a state where the game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. , when the first light emitting mode is possible to emit light, and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state when the game is possible and the detection means is in the closed detection state, the management display is displayed. When the detection means is inside and the detection state of the detection means is closed, the light emitting means is turned off while the management display continues to be displayed, so even if you forget to close the management display, it can be easily recognized from a distance. In addition, it is possible to reliably know by the light emitting means that the detection state of the detection means has become the closed detection state while the management display is displayed, and it is possible to prevent the administrator from forgetting to turn off the management display. Convenience can be improved.

Further, the entry prize performance is a performance that uses at least the light emitting means, and the game performance is a performance that uses at least the light emitting means.
It may be an effect using at least the display means. Further, the presentation means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2), the winning presentation is a presentation using at least the sound output means, and the game presentation is a presentation using at least the sound output means. It may also be a production that uses means. Further, the presentation means includes a sound output means (for example, speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2), the winning presentation is a presentation using at least the sound output means, and the game presentation is a presentation using at least the display means. It may also be a production using .

<Display example 6 of management screen>
Next, display example 6 of the management screen will be described using FIG. 15(B). FIG. 15(B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 6 of the management screen in chronological order.

Note that the states shown in FIG. 15(B)(1) to FIG. 15(B)(2) are the same as the states described using FIG. 15(A)(1) to FIG. 15(A)(2). Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted, and the drawings after FIG. 15(B)(3) will be described below.

<Management screen display example 6/Reel stop (replay winnings)>
The state shown in FIG. 15(B)(3) is when the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the game parlor manager or the like while the reel operation state shown in FIG. 15(B)(2) is in operation. The reels 110 to 112 have stopped and a prize has been won in the replay.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) has been internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) has been performed. The symbol combination (second stop mode; in this example, the symbol combination "Replay-Replay-Replay") is displayed, and the game effect (in this example, dialogue performance) will continue.

In addition, in this state, since a replay winning combination has been won and the front door 102 is in the open state, some of the light emitting means emit light in an open light mode (for example, the upper lamp 142 or the side In addition to continuing the flashing of the lamp 144, the other part of the light emitting means (for example, the reel backlight of each reel 110 to 112) is changed to a replay light emission mode (for example, , red). In addition, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound (in this example, a sound saying "The door is open") and a sound (in this example, a sound corresponding to a game performance (in this example, a dialogue performance)). , dialogue audio), and also outputs audio (in this example, winning sound) notifying that a replay winning combination has been won.

<Display example 6 of management screen/Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 15(B)(4) is the state after winning the replay combination (reply) described using FIG. 15(B)(3).

In the slot machine 100 of this example, the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are in the open state. is rotating and a certain operation is being performed (in this example, the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON), the stop button (in this example, stop buttons 137 to 139) is pressed. When the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the second stopping mode (in this example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (reply)), a management display (in this example, the management screen SD) is displayed. is configured not to start.

In the state shown in FIG. 15(B)(4), the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In the state where the setting key SW is turned on from OFF to ON (certain operation), the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are brought to a second stop by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button). Since this is the state immediately after the game is stopped in the pattern (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (reply)), the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is displayed as shown in FIG. 15(B)(4). ) without displaying the management screen SD in the display area of , 277)) and the game performance (in this example, the dialogue performance by the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) and the dialogue sound by the sound output means (speakers 272, 277)) are executed continuously without interruption. do.

Note that the "second stopping mode" according to the present invention is not limited to a symbol combination corresponding to a replay winning combination, but may be a symbol combination corresponding to another winning combination, It may be a specific symbol combination that does not correspond to a winning combination.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a light emitting means (for example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.); a door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front of the game machine and can be opened and closed; A detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and an operation means (for example, a setting key) that can perform a certain operation (for example, turning it from OFF to ON by rotating it). SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate; A game machine is provided with a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the doors, and the detection means detects that the detection state is closed detection when the door body is in the closed state. The detection means is a means that can change the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. For example, by inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the opening/closing sensor of the main body 101 and fixing it with tape or the like, the door body is in the open state. Even if the detection means is in the closed detection state, the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state. and is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed while the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"). and is configured such that the display of the management display is not started even if the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating; state, the reels are rotating, and the certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in a first stop state (e.g., corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)). When the reels are stopped in the first state, the reels are rotating, and the certain operation is being performed. In this state, when the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination) by the stop button, the display of the management display is not started. and configured such that display of the management display cannot be started even if the certain operation is performed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. and when the management display is displayed, even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state, the display of the management display (for example, Continuing the management screen SD shown in FIG. 13(A)(4), the light emitting means is in a state where a game is possible and the detection state of the detecting means is in the open detection state (for example, FIG. 13(A) ) In the state shown in (2)), the light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a first light emitting mode (for example, an open light emitting mode), and the light emitting means is in the state where the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detecting means is In the open detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(3)), it is possible to emit light in the first light emission mode, and the light emitting means is in a state where a game is possible and the detecting means is in a state where a game is possible. When the detection state is the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A) (5)), it is possible to emit light in a second light emission mode (for example, the light emission mode during stop, the light emission mode during play), and the light emission A game characterized in that the means turns off the light when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 13(A)(4)). It is a stand.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, for example, even if a fraudster performs a predetermined operation and opens the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed. By doing so, security can be improved. Furthermore, by continuing to display the management display even if the door open sensor is in the closed detection state after the management display has been displayed, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the game store staff. It becomes possible.

Further, the light emitting means emits the first light when a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state. When the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the state where the game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, it is possible to emit light in the second light emission state, and the detection means When the detection state is in the closed detection state, the light emitting means is turned off while the management display continues to be displayed, so even if you forget to turn off the management display, it is easy to recognize even from a distance, and the management display It is possible to reliably know by the light-emitting means that the detection state of the detection means has become the closed detection state while the display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator, such as by preventing forgetting to turn off the management display. can.

<Error notification display example 1>
Next, display example 1 of error notification will be described using FIG. 16(A). FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of error notification in chronological order.

<Error notification display example 1/Reel operating status: In operation (error non-detected state)>
The state shown in FIG. 16A (1) is a state in which the front door 102 is in the closed state, the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating). (state), and no error is detected.

In the same state, since the reel operation state is in operation, the light-emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a light-emitting mode during play, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output BGM during play, and are displayed. In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), effects during the game are displayed.

<Error notification display example 1/Reel operating state: In operation (error detection state)>
The state shown in FIG. 16 (A) (2) is when an error occurs and the reel operation state shown in FIG. state.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines the error notification period ( In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and that any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error notification is not in progress, then in the subsequent step S704, error notification start processing is performed. Execute.

The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(2) is a state in which the reel operation state is in operation (a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating) and is not in an error notification period, so other devices After finishing the monitoring process, the in-game presentation continues as shown in FIG. 16(A)(2) without starting error notification.

<Error notification display example 3/Reel operating status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(3) is when the reel operation state shown in FIG. is performed, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. In addition to displaying the combination (in this example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell"), a small winning combination is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), as shown in FIG. 16(A)(3). A prize notification display ND1 (in this example, an image of a bell symbol and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a prize has been won (bell) is displayed.

In addition, the light-emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a bell-emitting manner indicating that a small prize (bell) has been won, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) indicates that a small prize (bell) has been won. Outputs a bell sound effect that suggests this.

<Error notification display example 1/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described using FIG. 16(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are switched to the first stop mode (main stop mode) by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons). In the example, when it is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell), it is configured to start displaying an error notification ER (error display).
More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines the error notification period ( In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 16A (4) is an error notification possible period, the main control unit 300 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error command. is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

Note that the manner of error notification is not limited to this example; for example, after the first error notification in which the content of the error is indiscernible (for example, display of the character string "Please call a game store clerk"), , the content of the error may be notified in stages by executing a second error notification that allows the content of the error to be identified (for example, displaying a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). .

Further, as shown in FIG. 16(A) (2'), the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state). When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, a special error notification (error display) is started to be displayed. It may be configured to do so. Further, in this case, the configuration may be such that the error cannot be canceled while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating even if there is an operation using the reset SW (error cancellation operation).

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and a front surface of the gaming machine. A door body that is provided and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the opening/closing sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a certain operation (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). , a first operation means (e.g., setting key SW) capable of turning the OFF to ON operation by rotating the reel, and a plurality of reels that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., as shown in FIG. 1). A game comprising: reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the open state. , the detection state is a means capable of changing to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is a means capable of changing to the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. In the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the certain operation, the management display is configured not to start displaying even if the certain operation is performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button while the reels are being played, the management display starts to be displayed. When a certain error (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while the reels are stopped, an error display related to the certain error is displayed. The reels are configured to be able to start, and are configured not to start displaying the error display even if the certain error is detected in the first state where the reels are rotating. , in the first state, in the state in which the reels are rotating, and in the state in which a certain error is detected, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to move to the first stop state (for example, a small winning (bell) ), the display is configured to start displaying the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 16(A)(4)). It's a game machine.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means during a game (for example, while the reels are rotating or when medals are being bet), a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, security can be improved by configuring so that the management display is not displayed while the reels are rotating even when the door body is in an open state. In addition, even if an error occurs during gaming (for example, while the reels are spinning or medals are being bet), the error notification will not be started and the error notification will be started immediately after the game is stopped, thereby improving security. You can improve your performance.

Note that in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are moved to a second stop state (for example, a replay winning combination) by the stop button. (symbol combination corresponding to replay)), the display of the management display may not be started.

With this configuration, even if the reels are in a stopped state, if they stop in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it becomes a max bet state), it will be determined that gaming is in progress and the management display will be displayed. Security can be improved by preventing the display from starting.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Error notification display example 2>
Next, a second error notification display example will be described using FIG. 16(B). FIG. 16(B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of error notification in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 16(B)(1) to FIG. 16(B)(2) are the same states as the error detection state explained using FIG. 16(A)(1) to FIG. 16(A)(2). This is a state in which an error occurs and the reel is in an error detection state while the reel is in operation (error non-detection state). In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Error notification display example 2/Reel operating status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 16(B)(3) is when the reel operation state shown in FIG. 16(B)(2) is in operation (error detection state), and the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the administrator of the game parlor. is performed, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the replay combination (replay) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed, so although not shown, the symbol display window 113 corresponds to the replay combination (replay). As well as displaying the symbol combination (in this example, the symbol combination "Replay-Replay-Replay"), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), as shown in FIG. 16(B)(3), A winning notification display ND2 (in this example, an image of a replay symbol and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a prize has been won in a replay combination (replay) is displayed.

In addition, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a replay lighting mode that suggests that a replay winning combination (replay) has been won, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs light to indicate that a replay winning combination (replay) has been won. Outputs a replay sound effect that suggests a prize has been won.

<Error notification display example 2/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 16(A)(4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the replay combination (replay) explained using FIG. 16(A)(3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are switched to the second stop mode (main stop mode) by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop buttons). In the example, when the game is stopped at a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination (replay), it is configured to start displaying an error notification ER (error display).
More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines the error notification period ( In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704. do.

The state shown in FIG. 16B (4) is a replay state due to replay, but it is also an error notification possible period, so the main control unit 300 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 16(A)(4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

According to this example, in the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, and the state where a certain operation is being performed, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to change to the second stop state (in this example, replay). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (replay) is stopped, the management display will not start displaying, but the system is configured to start displaying an error, so if the game is stopped during play (for example, when the reels are spinning or the medals are Even if an error occurs in the bet state), the error notification will not start and if the game is stopped, the error notification will be started immediately regardless of how the reels are stopped, thereby improving security. can.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification>
Next, display example 1 of the management screen and error notification will be described using FIG. 17(A). FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Reel operating status: In operation (error detection status)>
The state shown in FIG. 17A (1) is when the reel operation state is in operation, the front door 102 is in the door open state, the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, and the error detection state, and the setting key SW is pressed by the administrator of the game parlor. An operation (certain operation) is performed to turn on the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is in the ON state.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. , even if an operation (certain operation) is performed to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, the state does not change to a state where the setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), and the management screen (management display) does not change. Configured not to start displaying.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In the state shown in FIG. 17A (1), one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not over, so the set value confirmation process is ended and the subsequent process of step S604 is executed. Since it is not executed, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display device 101a. Furthermore, since the process in step S605 is not executed, a setting confirmation start command indicating that setting confirmation is to be started is not sent to the first sub-control unit 400, so the display is not displayed as shown in FIG. 17(A)(1). In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the performance during the game is continued.

Further, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state, the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in an open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In this state, even if a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines the error notification period ( In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and that any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error notification is not in progress, then in the subsequent step S704, error notification start processing is performed. Execute.

The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(1) is a state in which the reel operation state is in operation (a state in which at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating) and is not in an error notification period, so other devices The monitoring process is ended and the performance during the game is continued without starting error notification.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Reel operation status: Operating → Stopped>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(2) is the third stop operation (stop operation) by the game parlor manager during the reel operation state shown in FIG. 17(A)(1) (error detection state). is performed, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a stopped state.

In the same state, the small winning combination (Bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. In addition to displaying the combination (in this example, the symbol combination "Bell-Bell-Bell"), a small winning combination is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), as shown in FIG. 17(A)(2). A prize notification display ND1 (in this example, an image of a bell symbol and a character string "GET!!") indicating that a prize has been won (bell) is displayed.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(3) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after winning the small winning combination (bell) described using FIG. 17(A)(2).

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or (a state in which an operation is being performed) and a state in which a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state), the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop When the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped by pressing the button), the management screen SD (management display) does not start to be displayed, but the error notification ER (error display) starts to be displayed.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines the error notification period ( In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 17A (3) is an error notification possible period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start process. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error command. is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(A)(3), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/error detection status → error non-detection status>
The state shown in FIG. 17A (4) is a state in which the error detection state shown in FIG. 17A (3) has changed to the error non-detection state.

In this state, after the medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error) has been resolved and the error detection state has changed to an error non-detection state, an error cancellation operation using the reset SW has been performed.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an open sound. Since the detection state has changed to an error non-detection state, the display of the preparation screen is started.

More specifically, after determining that the error notification end condition is satisfied in step S706 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is turned ON in step S708. If it is determined that there is a preparation screen, a preparation screen display command is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 instructing to start displaying the preparation screen in step S709. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this preparation screen display command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the preparation screen until the management screen can be displayed, or is capable of displaying the management screen. Even if it is, a process such as displaying the preparation screen is executed for a predetermined period of time.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17(A)(4), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, after finishing the error notification ER, a message indicating that the display of the management display SD is being prepared is displayed. The display of the screen (in this example, display of the character string "Preparing for management display") is started. Note that the screen before the management screen SD is displayed is not limited to this example, and may be the same screen as a part of the in-game effect, or the same screen as a part of the in-stop effect, for example. Good too.

<Display example 1 of management screen and error notification/Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 17(A)(5) is a state in which the error release operation is performed by the reset SW after the error non-detection state shown in FIG. 17(A)(4), and the display of the management screen has started. .

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or (a state in which an operation is being performed) and a state in which a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state), the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button), multiple reels are stopped, the error notification ER (error display) starts to be displayed, and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is not detected. When the reset SW (second operating means) is operated later, the display of the error notification ER (error display) and the preparation screen is ended, and the display of the management screen SD (management display) is started. It is configured.

More specifically, in steps S602 to S603 of the setting value confirmation process explained using FIG. The number of medals (in this example, 3 medals) has been bet, or the replay state due to replay), the open/close sensor is not in a closed detection state, and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating. If it is determined that the setting key SW is ON, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a in the following step S604.

In this example, since it is the set value confirmation valid period and the setting key SW is ON, a number indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating to start setting confirmation to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 17(A)(5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As shown in FIG. 17(A) (4'), even if the error detection state changes to the error non-detection state, if the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the closing detection state, the reset is not performed. The configuration may be such that the error cannot be canceled even if an operation (error cancellation operation) is performed using the SW (second operating means), and the error notification ER continues.

Furthermore, if the management screen SD is displayed while the number of coins to be paid out is displayed, the display of the number of coins to be paid out may be ended. Further, even if a certain error occurs while displaying the management screen SD, the configuration may be such that an error notification to notify the occurrence of the certain error is not performed.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and a front surface of the gaming machine. A door body that is provided and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the opening/closing sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a certain operation (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). , a first operation means (e.g., setting key SW) capable of turning the OFF to ON operation by rotating the reel, and a plurality of reels that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., as shown in FIG. 1). A game comprising: reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the open state. , the detection state is a means capable of changing to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is a means capable of changing to the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as a "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started, and in the first state, the reels are rotating. In the state where the reels are stopped, the management display is configured not to start displaying even if the certain operation is performed, and when a certain error (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (Medal selector error)) is configured to be able to start displaying an error display related to the certain error, and in the first state in which the reels are rotating, the certain error The display is configured so as not to start displaying the error display even if an error is detected, and the first state, the state where the reels are rotating, the state where the certain operation is being performed, and When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the state where a certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the display of the management display does not start, but the display of the management display does not start. This gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to start displaying an error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 17(A)(3)).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, security can be improved by displaying an error display with priority over a management display when the reels are stopped.

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. A possible door body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the open/close sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a certain operation (for example, rotating the door body). A first operating means (e.g., setting key SW) capable of switching from OFF to ON, and a second operating means (e.g., reset SW) are decorated with multiple types of designs and are driven to rotate. A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, a stop button) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels to individually stop the rotation of the reels. 137 to 139), wherein the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means includes: When the door body is in an open state, the detection state is a means capable of changing to an open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator. When the certain operation is performed while the detection state is the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the display of the management display can be started; The management display is configured not to start displaying even if the certain operation is performed while the reels are rotating, and when the reels are stopped, When an error (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, an error display related to the error can be started to be displayed, and when the reel is in the first state and the reel is in the first state, Even if the certain error is detected in the rotating state, the display of the error display is not started. When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in a state where an operation is being performed and a state where a certain error is detected (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the management The display is configured to start displaying the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIG. 17(A)(3)) without starting display of the display, and in the second state, the stop button causes the plurality of When the reels are stopped and the error display starts to be displayed, and the second operating means is operated after the certain error has not been detected, the display of the error display is stopped. , is configured to start displaying the management display (for example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIG. 17(A)(5)), and when the operation by the second operating means is performed, the error display is When ending the display and starting the display of the management display, a certain display (for example, "Management Display Preparation" shown in FIG. 17(A)(4)) is displayed before starting the display of the management display. The system is configured such that a display including a character string "in progress" may start to be displayed, and the certain display is a display that is not related to an error, and when the certain operation is being performed, The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to start displaying the management display without starting displaying the certain display when the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, security can be improved by displaying an error display with priority over a management display when the reels are stopped.

In addition, when an operation is performed using the second operation means to end displaying an error display and start displaying an administrative display, before starting to display the administrative display, a display related to the error is However, when a certain operation is being performed and the power is turned on, the display of the management display is started without starting the display of the certain display. By starting the display of a certain display before starting the display of the management display, it is possible to cancel the display of the management display while the certain display is being displayed. For example, if a game parlor is open and there is a risk that the display of the management display may start due to an erroneous operation, the display of the management display that is not desirable to show to the players may be terminated without displaying it. On the other hand, since the setting change operation (certain operation and turning on the power) is basically performed when the game parlor is not open, it is possible to display the management display without displaying a certain display. By displaying the information, it is possible to quickly start displaying the management display, and it is possible to improve convenience for the administrator.

Furthermore, it is provided with a second operation means (for example, a reset SW), and in the second state, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button, the display of the error display is started, and the certain error is detected. If an operation is performed using the second operating means after the state is reached, the display of the error display is terminated and the management display (for example, the administrator screen shown in FIG. 17A) (5) is displayed. SD) may be configured to start displaying.

With such a configuration, by clearing the error and displaying the management display after the error display ends, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for gaming store staff to use.

Further, when an operation is performed by the second operating means to end displaying the error display and start displaying the management display, a certain display ( For example, it may be configured to start displaying the preparation screen shown in FIG. 17(A)(4).

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually confirm that the second operation means has been accepted, and it is possible to improve convenience for the manager of the game parlor.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Moreover, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the second operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification>
Next, a second display example of the management screen and error notification will be described using FIG. 17(B). FIG. 17(B) is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen and error notification in chronological order.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/Turn on setting key SW with power OFF>
In the state shown in FIG. 17(B)(1), when the power is off, the front door 102 is in the open state, the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, and the error detection state, the setting key SW is pressed by the game parlor manager. An operation (certain operation) to turn on from OFF has been performed, and the setting key SW is in the ON state.

In this state, an error detection state is detected, but since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, and the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is not output. , the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is not displayed.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/Start of setting change mode, display of management screen>
The state shown in FIG. 17(B)(2) is when the setting key SW is ON, as described using FIG. 17(B)(1), and the game parlor manager operates the power switch. This is a state in which the power state has changed from power OFF to power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that when the power is turned on while the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON, the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be changed (setting change mode). In this state, the setting value is changed to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, and a setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

Furthermore, in the state shown in FIG. 17B (2), since the front door 102 is open, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is an open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. When the power is turned on in a state (second state) where a certain operation is being performed and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is being detected, It is configured to not start displaying the error notification ER (error display), but to start displaying the management screen (management display).

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 determines that the front door 102 is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON in steps S203 to S204 of the initial setting process described using FIG. However, in this example, since the front door 102 is in an open state and the setting key SW is ON, the setting changing process is started.

Subsequently, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating to start changing settings to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 When a setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, a process to start displaying the management screen is executed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 17(B)(2), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Next, in step S304 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 displays the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/Finalization of setting values>
The state shown in FIG. 17(B)(3) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, the main control unit 300 changes the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a in subsequent steps S308 to S309. , the set value is stored (determined) as a new set value, the display on the set value display device 101a is erased, and the set value is hidden.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification/Error notification display>
The state shown in FIG. 17B (4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after the setting values shown in FIG. 17B (3) are determined.

In the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (or When an operation using the start lever 135 is being performed, and when a certain error (in this example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is being detected (second state), the start lever 135 is not operated. When the operation (certain operation) of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is canceled after the setting key SW is turned on, the display of the management screen (management display) ends and the display of the error notification ER (error display) starts. is configured to do so.

More specifically, when each error is detected in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described using FIG. 11, the main control unit 300 determines the error notification period ( In this example, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating) and that each error notification is not in progress, error notification is started in the subsequent step S704. do.

Since the state shown in FIG. 17B (4) is an error notification possible period, the main control unit 300 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start process, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the error command. is received from the main control unit 300, a process for starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 17B (4), the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) displays an error notification ER (in this example, a character string "Selector error has occurred!!"). and the text string "Please call the game store clerk." is displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error light emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game store clerk. ”) is output.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and a front surface of the gaming machine. A door body that is provided and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), a detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door body (for example, the opening/closing sensor shown in FIG. 1), and a certain operation (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1). , a first operation means (e.g., setting key SW) capable of turning the OFF to ON operation by rotating the reel, and a plurality of reels that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols (e.g., as shown in FIG. 1). A game comprising: reels 110 to 112) shown in FIG. The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means that can change the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the open state. , the detection state is a means capable of changing to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the detection state of the detection means is a means capable of changing to the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as , referred to as the "first state"), when the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started. )) is configured to be able to start displaying an error display related to the certain error, and the first state, the state in which the certain operation is being performed, and the certain error are detected. When the power is turned on in the state in which the error display is in progress (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), the error display does not start to be displayed, but the management display (for example, as shown in FIG. 17(B)(2)) This game machine is configured to start displaying an administrator screen (SD).

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, by giving priority to displaying the management display over the error display when the power is turned on, it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the manager of the game parlor. .

Furthermore, it is provided with a start lever (for example, the start lever 135), and when the certain operation is canceled after the start lever is operated in the second state, the display of the management display is terminated, It may be configured to start displaying the error display (for example, error notification ER shown in FIG. 17(B)(4)).

With this configuration, after the start lever is operated, the management screen can be closed and an error display can be started, so that it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of an error.

Further, a second operating means (for example, a reset SW) is provided, so that when the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the error cannot be canceled even if an operation by the second operating means is performed. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, fraudulent acts such as forcibly canceling an error state can be prevented, and security can be improved.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the first operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

Moreover, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, only the administrator of the gaming parlor can operate the second operating means, and therefore, fraudulent acts and the like can be reliably prevented.

<Display setting history>
Next, display of setting history will be explained using FIG. 18(A). FIG. 18A is a diagram showing the flow of displaying the setting history in chronological order.

The states shown in FIG. 18(A)(1) to FIG. 18(A)(2) are the same states as the setting change mode explained using FIG. 12(A)(1) to FIG. 12(A)(2). This is a state in which the power is turned on while the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON, and the setting value can be changed (setting change mode). In order to avoid redundant explanation, detailed explanation of the same state will be omitted.

<Specific operations in settings history display/settings change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18A (3) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting change mode and the display of the setting history has started.

The display means of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) displays a history display (in this example, The setting history SH) can be displayed, and if the first event (fixing the setting value due to the setting change) occurs in a certain state (in this example, setting change mode), the first event (setting value confirmation due to the setting change) can be displayed. In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting value determination) has occurred, a history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event that occurred in the past (setting value determination due to a setting change) can be displayed.

In this example, when the setting history item is selected from the menu display on the management screen SD by a specific operation (operation using the cross button 193), the settings shown in FIG. 18(A)(3) are Display history SH.

The display format of the setting history SH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the date and time when the setting change (or setting confirmation) was made, the setting value set (or confirmed) by the setting change (or setting confirmation), and the details of the operation. (Setting change or setting confirmation) can be displayed in chronological order. (No. 2) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 〇 year 〇 month 〇 day 〇 hour 〇 minute 〇 seconds, setting value: 6, operation: confirmation] Items related to setting changes and confirmations made in the past are listed in chronological order. (in order of newest (or oldest) date and time).

According to this example, since the manager of the gaming parlor can easily check the setting values set in the past, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the management of the gaming parlor. Further, even if the information is displayed to the player due to fraudulent operation, the history display is not related to the current event, but is related to events that have occurred in the past, so it is unlikely to be used for fraudulent activities.

<Displaying setting history/confirming setting values in setting change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18(A) (4) is a state in which the start lever 135 is operated by the manager of the game parlor in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S307 of the setting change process that the start lever 135 has been operated, the main control unit 300 changes the setting value displayed on the setting value display device 101a in subsequent steps S308 to S309. , is stored (determined) as a new setting value (here, setting 5), and the display on the setting value display device 101a is erased to hide the setting value.

Furthermore, when the first event (fixing of the setting value due to a setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the slot machine 100 is configured to In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change (confirmation) has occurred, the history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event (confirmation of setting value due to setting change) that has occurred this time cannot be displayed.

According to this example, since the history of the setting value due to the current setting change (history display regarding the first event that occurred this time) is not displayed, for example, if the player performs an unauthorized setting change operation, the setting value will be changed. Security can be improved by not being able to easily check whether or not the process was executed correctly.

In the state shown in FIG. 18(A)(4), the setting key is kept ON, so the setting history SH continues to be displayed, but in the setting change mode, the setting history corresponding to the setting value set this time In the example, the date and time when the setting change was made, the setting value set by the setting change, and the details of the operation (setting change) are not displayed.

Furthermore, when the first event (fixing of the setting value due to a setting change) occurs in a certain state (setting change mode in this example), the slot machine 100 is configured to In a certain state (setting change mode) in which a setting change (confirmation) has occurred, it is possible to erase at least a part of the history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event that occurred in the past (fixation of a setting value due to a setting change). On the other hand, the history display (setting history SH) regarding the first event that occurred this time (determination of setting value due to setting change) cannot be deleted.

Specifically, by operating the cross button 193 and selecting the "History Delete" button located below the setting history SH and pressing the button, at least part of the past setting history SH (in this example , only the currently displayed setting history SH) are deleted.

According to this example, the history related to the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current settings change) cannot be cleared (deleted), so if the settings are changed illegally, the evidence of fraud will be destroyed. It is difficult to achieve this, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current setting change), it is necessary to transition to a certain state again, which is a high risk for fraudsters. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

<Displaying the settings history/exiting the settings change mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18A (5) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the gaming parlor in the setting change mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines in step S310 of the setting change process that the setting key SW is OFF, it transmits a setting change end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting change is to be ended. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change termination command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 18(A)(5), the setting history SH of the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. . In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a performance to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal performance.

<Display settings history/start settings confirmation mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 18(A)(6), when the front door 102 shown in FIG. 18(A)(5) is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is pressed by the administrator of the game parlor. An operation (certain operation) to turn on from OFF has been performed, and the setting key SW is in the ON state.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that when the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON while the power is on, the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Then, in the same state, a transition is made to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state). When an operation (certain operation) is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started, and the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). However, in this example, since the setting history item was selected on the most recent management screen SD, the setting history is first displayed in the setting confirmation mode, as shown in Figure 18 (A) (6). Display SH.

In this example, since the setting value was changed to setting 5 in the most recent setting change mode (FIG. 18 (A) (4)), in the setting history SH, the first event that occurred in the past (setting value change ), the history display "(No. 3) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 〇 year 〇 month 〇 day 〇 hour 〇 minute ○ seconds, setting value: 5, operation: change" and the current setting confirmation mode The history display corresponding to the confirmation of the setting value is "(No. 4) Setting change/confirmation date and time: 〇 year 〇 month 〇 〇 hour 〇 minute ○ second, setting value: 5, operation: confirmation" Additional history display is displayed.

According to this example, since the manager of the gaming parlor can easily check the setting values set in the past, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to use for the management of the gaming parlor.

<Display error history>
Next, display of error history will be explained using FIG. 18(B). FIG. 18(B) is a diagram showing the flow of error history display in chronological order.

<Display error history/start setting confirmation mode>
In the state shown in FIG. 18(B)(1), the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON by the manager of the game parlor when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state. This is a state in which an operation (a certain operation) has been performed and the setting key SW has been turned on.

The slot machine 100 is configured so that when the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON while the power is on, the slot machine 100 enters a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Then, in the same state, a transition is made to a state in which setting values can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode).

Further, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the opening/closing sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state). When an operation (certain operation) is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started, so as shown in FIG. A management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display device 157).

<Specific operations in error history display/setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18(B)(2) is a state in which a specific operation has been performed in the setting confirmation mode and the display of the error history has started.

The display means (liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 displays a history display (in this example, error history EH) indicating the history of the occurrence of the second event (in this example, door opening and door closing). possible, and if the second event (door opening or door closing) occurs in a certain state (in this example, setting confirmation mode), the first event (door opening or door closing) will occur. In the state (setting confirmation mode), it is possible to display a history display (error history EH) regarding the first event (door opening and door closing) that occurred this time and in the past.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating the open detection state in step S502 of the device monitoring process described using FIG. 9, it detects that the front door 102 has been opened. The opening detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected is stored in the RAM 308, and a door opening detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. is received from the main control unit 300, open detection information indicating that opening of the front door 102 has been detected (in this example, information indicating "open" and the date and time of opening) is stored in the RAM 408 as historical information in chronological order. It will be memorized as , and will notify you that the door is open.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating the open detection state in step S502 of the device monitoring process, it stores in the RAM 308 closure detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been closed. When a door closing detection command indicating that the closing of the front door 102 has been detected is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives this door closing detection command from the main control unit 300, Closure detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been closed (in this example, information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) is stored in the RAM 408 in chronological order as history information.

In this example, when the error history item is selected from the menu display on the management screen SD by a specific operation (operation using the cross button 193), the release detection information (information indicating "open" and the release date and time) and closure detection information (information indicating "closed" and date and time of closure) are acquired from the RAM 408, and the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is displayed as shown in FIG. The current and past error history EH is displayed.

The display format of the error history EH is not particularly limited, but in this example, it is possible to display the error occurrence date and time and the details of the error that occurred in chronological order. For example, "(No. 1) Error occurrence date and time: 〇hours〇minutes〇seconds, error occurred: selector error, (No. 2) error occurrence date and time: 〇month〇day, 〇hours〇minutes〇seconds, error occurred: door opened, (No.3) error occurrence date and time:〇year〇month 〇day〇hour〇minute〇second, error occurred: door closed, (No. 4) error occurrence date and time: 〇year〇month〇〇hour〇minute〇second, error occurred: door opened, this time and in the past. Displays items related to errors in chronological order (in order of newest (or oldest)).

<Display error history/Front door: Door open state → Door closed state>
In the state shown in FIG. 18(B)(3), the front door 102 is closed in the door open state shown in FIG. 18(B)(2), and the front door 102 changes from the door open state to the door closed state. This is the state that has become.

In the slot machine 100, even if the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state while the error history EH (management display) is displayed, the error history EH (management display) is displayed. In this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, the error history EH is continued to be displayed. In addition, in the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) that were emitting light in the open mode are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that was outputting the open sound is set to non-output. .

In addition, since the front door 102 has changed from the door open state to the door closed state, "(No. 5) error Date and time of occurrence: Year, month, day, hour, day, minute and second (date and time when closing of front door 102 was detected), error: door closed'' is additionally displayed.

According to this example, since the history of opening and closing of the door body can be displayed, it is possible to check whether there has been any fraudulent activity and the past work status, etc., which increases the convenience of the manager of the game parlor. Can be done.

<Displaying error history/exiting setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIG. 18B (4) is a state in which the setting key SW is turned OFF as a result of the operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF by the administrator of the game parlor in the setting confirmation mode.

If the main control unit 300 determines that the setting key SW is OFF in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 sends a setting confirmation end command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the setting confirmation is to be ended. However, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, it executes a process of terminating the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 18(B)(4), the error history EH displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal performance is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, a performance to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started as a normal performance.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) is a game machine equipped with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). Then, the display means displays a history display (for example, the setting history SH shown in FIG. 18(A) (3)) indicating the history of the occurrence of the first event (for example, confirmation of a setting value due to a setting change). The display means is capable of displaying a history display (for example, error history EH shown in FIG. 18B (2)) indicating a history of occurrences of second events (for example, door opening and door closing). can be displayed, and when the second event occurs in a certain state, in the certain state in which the second event has occurred, the history display regarding the second event that has occurred this time is displayed. possible, and if the first event occurs in the certain state, the history display regarding the first event that occurred this time is not displayed in the certain state in which the first event occurred. This is a game machine that is characterized by the fact that:

Furthermore, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), an operation means, and a front surface of the game machine. A game machine comprising a door body that is provided and can be opened and closed, and a detection means capable of detecting an open/closed state of the door body, the display means indicating a history of the occurrence of the first event. A history display (for example, the setting history SH shown in FIG. 18(A)(3)) can be displayed, and the first event is that an operation to confirm a setting value is performed by the operating means. , the display means is capable of displaying a history display (for example, the error history EH shown in FIG. 18B (2)) indicating the history of occurrence of the second event, and the detection means is configured to When the body is in a closed state, the detection state is a means capable of changing to the closed detection state, and the second event is that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state; The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for the administrator, and when the second event occurs while the management display is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a "certain state"). In the certain state in which the second event has occurred, the history display regarding the second event that has occurred this time can be displayed, and when the first event occurs in the certain state, , in the certain state where the first event occurred, the history display regarding the first event that occurred in the past certain state can be displayed, but the history display regarding the first event that occurred this time can be displayed. The history display cannot be displayed, and in the certain state, the history regarding the first event that occurred in the past can be erased by operating the operating means, but the history regarding the first event that occurred this time can be deleted. The gaming machine is characterized in that the history cannot be deleted.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a history display regarding a first event that occurred in a certain state in the past can be displayed, but a history display regarding a first event that occurred currently cannot be displayed. In addition, the history regarding the first event that occurred in the past can be deleted by operating the operating means, but the history regarding the first event that occurred currently cannot be deleted. When a setting change operation is performed, it is not easy to confirm whether the setting change was performed correctly, and it is difficult to destroy evidence of fraudulent activity, so security can be improved. In addition, if you want to delete the history related to the first event that occurred this time, you need to go to a certain state again and use the operating means to delete it, which is a high risk for fraudsters. Acts can be prevented before they occur. On the other hand, since the history regarding the first event that occurred in a certain state in the past can be deleted, unnecessary information can be arbitrarily deleted, increasing convenience for the administrator.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the history display regarding the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting value due to the current setting change) is not displayed, for example, if the player performs an unauthorized setting change operation. In some cases, security can be improved by not being able to easily check whether the settings have been changed correctly.

Further, when the second event occurs in the certain state, the history display regarding the second event that occurred in the past can be displayed in the certain state in which the second event occurred. and when the first event occurs in the certain state, the history display regarding the first event that occurred in the past can be displayed in the certain state in which the first event occurred. There may be.

With such a configuration, the manager of the game parlor can easily check the setting values set in the past, so it is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use for the management of the game parlor. Further, even if the information is displayed to the player due to fraudulent operation, it is unlikely to be used for fraudulent activities because it is a history display of events that occurred in the past.

Further, when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state in which the first event occurred, at least a part of the history regarding the first event that occurred in the past is While being erasable, the history regarding the first event that occurred this time may be non-erasable.

With such a configuration, the history related to the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current setting change) cannot be cleared, so if the settings are changed illegally, it is necessary to try to destroy evidence of fraudulent activity. is difficult, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (the history of the setting values due to the current setting change), it is necessary to transition to a certain state again, which is a high risk for fraudsters. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, the apparatus may include an operating means, and the first event may be that an operation for determining a set value is performed by the operating means.

With such a configuration, even if an operation to confirm a setting value is performed, the setting value confirmed by the operation will not be displayed, so that, for example, if a player performs an unauthorized setting change operation. In addition, security can be improved by not being able to easily check whether the settings have been changed correctly.

The game machine also includes a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) that is provided on the front side of the game machine, and a detection means that can detect the open and closed state of the door body (for example, an open/close sensor). , the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the second event means that the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state. It may be to become in a state.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the history of opening and closing of the door body, so it is possible to check whether there has been any fraudulent activity or the past work status, etc., which increases the convenience of the game parlor manager. can be increased.

<Volume adjustment>
Next, volume adjustment will be explained using FIG. 19.

<If the volume adjustment/management screen is not displayed>
FIG. 19(A) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed.

In FIG. 19(A)(1), the power state is ON, the front door 102 is in the closed state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state, and the stop effect is being executed and the management screen is not displayed. state.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitting bodies (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in a stop light mode, and the stop BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), a stop effect is displayed, and in this example, stop BGM is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example).

FIG. 19A (2) shows a state in which a volume increase operation is performed using the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) in a state where the volume value display VD is not displayed.

Here, the player volume setting means is a means (second volume setting means) provided at a position where it can be operated whether the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in an open state or a closed state. For example, in addition to the cross button 193 (the upper button, lower button, right button, or left button of the cross key 193a, and the OK button 193b) explained using FIG. This includes a volume switch and the like provided on a display device, a touch panel provided on a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a sub-liquid crystal), and the like.

In the same state, when the volume value display VD is not displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or When the right button operation is received, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is started, but the volume is not increased.

In this example, when a volume increase operation is received by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means), the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value is started, and at the same time, Although the configuration is such that the volume is not increased, the volume may be increased at the same time as the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value is started to be displayed.

Further, the volume increase operation by the player's volume setting operation means (second operation means) is not limited to the operation using the upper button or the right button of the cross button 193, for example, the operation using the upper button of the cross button 193, The volume increase operation is to increase the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the operation with the right button of the cross button 193 is used as the volume increase operation to increase the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). It can also be used as a light amount increasing operation to increase the amount of light output from a light, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. good.

Further, in this example, an increase in volume has been explained, but a decrease in volume is similarly achieved by reducing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) in a state where the volume value display VD is not displayed. When a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower or left button of the cross button 193) is received, the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is displayed. The configuration is configured so that the volume does not decrease while starting.

In this example, when a volume reduction operation is received by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means), the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value is started, and at the same time, Although the volume is configured not to be decreased, the volume may be decreased at the same time as the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value is started to be displayed.

Further, the volume reduction operation by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is not limited to the operation using the lower button or the left button of the cross button 193. For example, the operation using the lower button of the cross button 193, The volume reduction operation is used to increase the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the operation with the left button of the cross button 193 is used as a volume reduction operation to increase the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). It can also be used as a light amount reduction operation to reduce the amount of light output from a light, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. good.

In addition to the display of the volume value display VD, other displays (for example, Displays related to light intensity, music, menu displays, power saving displays, etc.) may be started.

In addition, in this example, the volume increase operation (or volume decrease operation) by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) has been explained, but the volume increase operation (or volume decrease operation) by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) has been explained. The operation is not limited to this example, and the sound output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 in this example) when the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is operated. It is sufficient if the configuration is such that settings regarding the volume can be changed.

Here, the "settings related to volume" that are possible when an operation is performed using the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) refers to the current volume that is (is) being output from the sound output means. In addition to settings for changing (adjusting) Settings for changing (adjusting) the volume of one, multiple, or all sounds (payout sound, winning sound, music, etc.), and the volume of the sound output from the sound output means when the power is turned on. It may be one, a plurality, or all of the settings for returning to the initial setting values.

FIG. 19(A)(3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 19(A)(2) is displayed.

In this state, while the volume value display VD is being displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, an operation using the upper or right button of the cross button 193) using the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is performed. ), the volume is increased by one step, and a volume value display VD indicating the increased volume value (in this example, volume 5) is displayed, and the volume value after the increase (in this example, volume 5) is displayed. , the volume is 5), and BGM is output while stopped.

In this example, an increase in the volume has been described, but a decrease in the volume can also be similarly performed by performing a volume reduction operation ( In this example, the volume is decreased by one level upon reception of an operation by the down or left button of the cross button 193, and a volume value display indicating the volume value after the decrease (in this example, volume 3) While displaying the VD, the stopped BGM is output at a reduced volume value (volume 3 in this example).

<When displaying the volume adjustment/management screen>
FIG. 19(B) is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is displayed.

In FIG. 19(B)(1), when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is turned on and the management screen SD is displayed. It is in a state of being

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an open light emission mode, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) output an open sound, and the liquid crystal display In the display area of the display device 157, the management screen SD is displayed, and in this example, an opening sound is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example).

Note that the release sound and error sound may be output at a predetermined volume (for example, maximum volume) regardless of the set volume value.

FIG. 19B (2) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the management screen SD is being displayed and the volume value display VD2 is not displayed.

In the same state, while the management screen SD is being displayed and the volume value display VD2 is not being displayed, a volume increase operation (main In this example, upon reception of an operation by the upper or right button of the cross button 193, the volume value display VD that indicates the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) starts to be displayed, while the volume is configured so as not to increase.

In this example, an increase in the volume has been explained, but a decrease in the volume is also possible when the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) The current volume value (in this example, volume 4) is triggered by receiving a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower or left button of the cross button 193) to decrease the volume output from the While the display of the volume value display VD indicating ``VD'' starts, the volume is configured not to decrease.

In this example, while the management screen SD is being displayed and the volume value display VD is not being displayed, the volume increase operation (or volume decrease operation) by the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) is performed. operation), the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) displays a management display (in this example, the management screen SD) and a display regarding the volume (in this example, the volume value display VD). Although the volume can be displayed, the volume cannot be changed by operation using the player volume setting operation means (second operation means). may be configured.

Furthermore, even with this configuration, an operation using the second operation means is performed before the display of the administrator display starts, and the display related to the volume is already displayed before the display of the administrator display starts. In some cases, until the condition for erasing the volume-related display is satisfied (for example, until a certain period (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the display of the volume-related display), the volume-related display will not be displayed while the management display is being displayed. The display may be configured to be displayed continuously.

FIG. 19B (3) shows a state in which the volume increase operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 19B (2) is displayed.

In the same state, while the volume value display VD2 is displayed, a volume increase operation (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or However, since the management screen SD is being displayed, the volume is not increased and the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is accepted. The display continues.

In this example, an increase in volume has been explained, but a decrease in volume is also a method for decreasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) in a state where the volume value display VD2 is displayed. Even if a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower or left button of the cross button 193) is received, the volume will not be decreased and the current level will be changed because the management screen SD is being displayed. The volume value display VD indicating the volume value (volume 4 in this example) continues to be displayed.

Note that an administrator volume setting means (third operation means) may be provided as an operation means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in an open state; in this case, When the volume increase operation or volume decrease operation is performed using the player volume setting operation means (third operation means) while the volume value display VD is displayed as shown in (A) (3) of the same figure. Additionally, the volume may be adjustable, and a volume value display VD indicating the volume value after volume adjustment may be displayed.

Here, the administrator volume setting means is a means (third operating means) provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body (in this example, the front door 102) is in an open state. For example, in addition to the administrator's volume control SW (volume SW) provided inside the main body 101, the buttons and DIP switches provided inside and on the back of the main body 101, the touch panel provided inside the main body 101, etc. Applicable.

In addition to the volume value display VD, other displays (for example, Displays related to light intensity, music, menu displays, power saving displays, etc.) may be started.

Further, the volume setting operation means for the administrator (the third operation means) is not limited to an operation means that can perform a volume increase operation and a volume decrease operation. For example, in addition to a volume increase operation and a volume decrease operation, A light amount increasing operation (or a light amount decreasing operation) for increasing (or decreasing) the amount of light output from the output means (for example, a backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24). ) etc. may be used. That is, when an operation is performed using the administrator volume setting operation means (third operation means), the setting regarding the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277) is changed. It is sufficient if the configuration is such that it is possible to do so.

Here, the "settings related to volume" that are possible when an operation is performed using the administrator's volume setting operation means (third operation means) refers to the current volume that is (is) being output from the sound output means. In addition to settings for changing (adjusting) Settings for changing (adjusting) the volume of one, multiple, or all sounds (payout sound, winning sound, music, etc.), and setting the volume of the sound output from the sound output means to the initial value. settings for reverting, settings for upper and lower volume limits that can be set using the player volume setting operation means (second operation means), standard volume settings (initial setting value when the power is turned on), etc. The settings may be one, multiple, or all of them.

In addition, a volume value display that starts to be displayed when an operation by the player's volume setting operation means (second operation means) is accepted, and an operation by the administrator's volume setting operation means (third operation means) is accepted. The volume value display that starts to be displayed in this case may have the same display mode or may have a different display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 19(B), the front door 102 is in the open state, the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the setting key SW is ON, and the management screen SD is displayed. In this state, when an operation is performed using the administrator volume setting operation means (third operation means), settings regarding the volume of sound output from the sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277) are changed. However, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state (pseudo closed state) by a predetermined operation, the administrator volume It may be configured such that the setting regarding the volume can be changed even when an operation is performed using the setting operation means (third operation means).

According to this example, the volume cannot be changed using the operating means (second operating means) provided on the front of the gaming machine, and the volume cannot be changed using the operating means (third operating means) provided inside the gaming machine. By allowing changes to be made, if for some reason the administrator displays the management screen while the player is playing, the volume set by the player may be changed by mistake. By making it possible to change the volume while also making it possible to increase convenience for the administrator.

Furthermore, when the display of the management screen SD is ended (erased) in the state shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the setting regarding the volume cannot be changed by operation using the player volume setting operation means (second operation means) until the time period (seconds) has elapsed. In this case, the display regarding the volume (for example, the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)) can be displayed by operating the player volume setting operation means (second operation means). It may be possible or it may be impossible to display.

Immediately after the management display ends, there is a high possibility that the administrator is still touching the game machine. For example, if the administrator is wiping the game machine, etc. It is expected that the volume change etc. will be performed in vain as a result of pressing the ``method''. By disabling settings related to the volume using the second operation method, it is possible to prevent the volume from being changed unnecessarily, and unless the administrator restores the volume that has been changed unnecessarily. It is possible to reduce unnecessary trouble (wasted effort and man-hours).

Furthermore, when the display of the management screen SD is ended (erased) in the state shown in FIG. The configuration may be such that the settings regarding the volume can be changed by an operation using the administrator's volume setting operation means (third operation means) even before the time period (seconds) has elapsed. In this case, the display regarding the volume (for example, the volume value display VD shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)) can be displayed by operating the administrator's volume setting operation means (third operation means). It may be possible or it may be impossible to display.

Immediately after the end of the management display, there is a high possibility that the administrator is still touching the gaming machine, and with such a configuration, the administrator may still be touching the gaming machine immediately after the end of the management display. By making it possible to change the settings related to the volume using the third operation means, even if there is a problem, the administrator can perform the work, and the convenience for the administrator can be improved.

As explained above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and a sound output means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). , speakers 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2), a door provided at the front of the game machine that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), and a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door. (for example, the opening/closing sensor shown in FIG. 1), a first operation means (for example, setting key SW) that can perform a certain operation (for example, turning it from OFF to ON by rotating it), and a second operation means (for example, the setting key SW). means (for example, a volume setting operation means for a player such as the cross button 193 shown in FIG. 1), and a third operation means (for example, a volume setting operation means for an administrator such as a volume adjustment SW for an administrator). The gaming machine is equipped with a gaming machine, wherein the detection means is capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state; In this case, the detection state of the detection means can be changed to an open detection state by performing a predetermined operation regarding the detection means, even if the door body is in the open state. is configured to be in the closed detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and when the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, the display means is configured to be in the closed detection state. When the operation is performed, it is configured to be able to start displaying the management display, and the second operating means can be operated whether the door body is in the open state or the closed state. means provided at a position, and configured to be able to change settings regarding the volume of sound output from the sound output means when an operation by the second operation means is performed, While the management display is being displayed, the display means can display the management display and a display related to the volume (for example, the volume value display VD2 shown in FIG. 19(B)(2)). The third operating means is a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state, and the third operating means is a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state. Even when the display is displayed, the settings related to the volume can be changed when the third operation means is operated, and the door body is in the open state. The game machine is characterized in that the setting regarding the volume can be changed even if the third operation means is operated when the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. be.

According to the game machine according to this embodiment, the volume cannot be changed using the operation means (second operation means) provided on the front side of the game machine, and the operation means (third operation means) provided inside the game machine cannot be changed. By making it possible to change the volume using the operating means), if for some reason the administrator displays the management screen while the player is playing, it will be possible to prevent the player from accidentally changing the volume set by the player. By making it possible to change the volume while preventing the volume from being changed, convenience for the administrator can be increased.

Moreover, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, not only can erroneous operations by players be prevented, but also the security of the management display for the administrator can be improved.

Further, even if the management display ends, the operation by the second operation means is not performed until a first period (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) has elapsed after the management display ended. It may also be configured such that settings related to volume cannot be changed.

Immediately after the management display ends, there is a high possibility that the administrator is still touching the game machine. For example, if the administrator is wiping the game machine, etc. It is expected that the volume change etc. will be performed in vain as a result of pressing the ``method''. By disabling settings related to the volume using the second operation method, it is possible to prevent the volume from being changed unnecessarily, and unless the administrator restores the volume that has been changed unnecessarily. It is possible to reduce unnecessary trouble (wasted effort and man-hours).

The in-game light emitting mode of the light emitting means explained using FIGS. 12 to 19 is a mode in which light is emitted according to the effect being executed on the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157) or the operating status of the reels. . That is, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means during the game is not limited to the mode in which the light emitting means always emits light (or flashes), but may include a period in which the light emitting means is turned off. For example, even during a game, the light-emitting means may be turned off during a period when no interlocking effects or winning effects are being performed, or the light-emitting means may be turned off even when interlocking effects or other effects are being executed. If it is possible to improve the presentation effect by including the light emitting means, a period during which the light emitting means is turned off may be provided. On the other hand, the light emitting means may always emit light or blink during bonuses and AT in order to liven up the game.

Furthermore, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means while the light emitting means is stopped, as explained using FIGS. You can stay there. For example, after the game stops (after the reels stop and the effect being executed on the display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 157) ends) and until the demonstration effect starts, the light emitting means is turned off. You can leave it there.

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a simple game flow showing an AT system game state.

First, the AT system gaming state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, a normal section, or a normal state. The high navigation state is a state in which there is a higher probability that operation navigation will be executed than in the low navigation state (a state that is more advantageous than the low navigation state (normal state) regarding operation navigation (notification of operation information)). It is also called an advantageous section or an advantageous state.

Here, the operation navigation is an effect that notifies operation information (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (operation means) in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state. For example, an effect that notifies you of the correct operation order of the combinations to be pressed (for example, an effect that displays characters ``left → middle → right''), etc. corresponds to this.

If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate), is advantageous. Furthermore, since it is easier to shift to the CZ state or AT state in the stock time or CZ state than in the normal stage, the stock time or CZ state can also be said to be an advantageous state compared to the normal stage.

Note that in this example, the low navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. The state where operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be changed to the state where operation navigation is executed.

Each AT system game state is subdivided and managed, and this is called a performance state. In this example, the performance state in the low navigation state includes a special stage, and the performance state in the high navigation state includes stock time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ST"), normal stage, and CZ state (compared to the normal stage). (a state in which it is easy to transition to an AT state) and an AT state. Among these performance states, the AT state is, in principle, a state in which the number of balls increased. Note that the performance state is not limited to this example, and for example, the high navigation state may include other performance states such as a confirmed notification state and a pullback state.

In this embodiment, when condition (A) is satisfied in the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section) (in this example, when winning a winning combination other than a losing one), the high navigation state (advantageous section) is set. Move to stock time. Note that after clearing the RAM such as setting changes, the system may be configured to shift to stock time when condition (A) is satisfied, or may be configured not to shift.

Stock time (first gaming state) is a state in which it is possible to acquire the right to move to the CZ state (hereinafter simply referred to as "CZ") through a CZ lottery or to stock one or more CZs. .

In this stock time, even if you win the CZ lottery, you will not enter the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (first period, in this example, 50 games) has passed, and the CZ obtained in the CZ lottery will not be transferred to the CZ state. Stock (accumulate).

Then, when condition (B) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has elapsed without stocking CZ), the game moves to the normal stage, When condition (C) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time prescribed number of games (50 games in this example) has elapsed while CZ is being stocked), the state shifts to the CZ state. Note that the transition destination when condition (C) is satisfied during the stock time is not limited to the CZ state, and may be configured to transition to the CZ state after passing through the normal stage, for example.

Note that the stock time end conditions of condition (B) and condition (C) are not limited to this example, and may be less than or greater than 50 games.

According to this example, even if you win the CZ lottery (even if a certain condition is met), you will remain in the CZ state (second gaming state) until the stock time specified number of games (first period) ends. Since no transition occurs, the game can be enjoyed for a long period of time during the stock time specified number of games (first period), and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section, the transition to the CZ state or AT state will not occur until the stock time specified number of games has elapsed. When moving from one section to the next advantageous section, it is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls are rolled out in a short period of time, and the gambling nature becomes unnecessarily high.

The normal stage has various production stages, and is a state in which a CZ lottery can be performed in which the right to transition to the CZ state (CZ) can be acquired.

In this normal stage, if condition (D) is satisfied (in this example, if CZ is won), the state immediately shifts to CZ without stocking CZ.

The CZ state (second gaming state) is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state (special stage) in the low navigation state (normal section) or the normal stage in the high navigation state (advantageous section). (For example, it is easier to shift to the AT state if you win a rare combination in the CZ state than if you win a rare combination in the normal stage.) In this example, the weak CZ state (third gaming state) , a strong CZ state (fourth gaming state), and an AT confirmed CZ state (fourth gaming state). Note that the strong CZ state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the AT state compared to the weak CZ state, and the AT confirmed CZ state is a state that always transitions to the AT state after the CZ state ends.

In the CZ state, if condition (E) is satisfied (in this example, when a predetermined number of CZ games (in this example, 9 games) have passed without winning AT in the CZ state), the game moves to the normal stage, When condition (F) is satisfied (in this example, when AT is won in the CZ state and a predetermined number of CZ games (in this example, 9 games) have elapsed), the AT state is entered.

Note that the conditions for ending the CZ state in condition (E) and condition (F) are not limited to this example, and may be less than or more than 9 games, but if more than 9 games, it may be less than the stock time. Preferably number of games. Furthermore, the CZ state may be terminated by winning a specified number of specific winning combinations, or if the AT state is won, the state may be shifted to the AT state before a predetermined number of games have elapsed (CZ ).

The AT state is a state in which AT games can be played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games in one set), and is better than the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section) or the stock time in the high navigation state (advantageous section). This is an advantageous state for the player, and in this example, the normal AT, the AT add-on state where an AT game add-on lottery is executed, and the ED state where an ED (ending) effect indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed. There is.

In addition, in this AT state, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game, and if the set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (in this example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed. A set of 30 AT games will be given, and the AT state will be extended.

If condition (G) is satisfied in this AT state (if the AT end condition is met (in this example, when all games are played in the AT state), or if the advantageous section end condition is met (in this example, if all games are played in the AT state) Then, if 1500 games have passed in the advantageous section, or if 2400 coins have been paid out in the advantageous section), the game moves to a special stage in a low navigation state (normal section).

Note that the advantageous period end condition is just one example, and may be a case where 3,000 games have elapsed or a case where 3,000 coins have been paid out.

Furthermore, in this example, the presentation state is set to a special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), but even in the low navigation state (normal section), the presentation state may be stock time or a normal stage. In other words, even if you are in a low navigation state (normal section), if the production state is set to stock time (or/and normal stage), the stock time (or/and normal stage) is the period of the low navigation state (normal section). There will be a period of high navigation status (advantageous section). Conversely, the special stage may be continued even if the state shifts to a high navigation state (advantageous section).

<CZ lottery>
Next, using FIGS. 21(b) and 21(c), a description will be given of the CZ lottery executed during the stock time and the normal stage.

The CZ lottery is a lottery in which the right to transition to the CZ state (CZ) can be obtained, and in this example, a specific symbol combination (in this example, weak cherry, watermelon, chance, strong When a cherry) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, a CZ lottery is executed using a CZ determination table to be described later.

The lottery modes of the CZ lottery include a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively high, and a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the CZ lottery is relatively low. When moving to the normal stage or stock time, the low probability mode is set first, but if a certain winning combination (for example, a rare combination with a low winning probability) is won in each performance state, the high probability mode is set. be done.

<CZ Lottery/Normal Stage>
FIG. 21(b) is a diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in the normal stage. For convenience of explanation, only the CZ determination table that is referred to when the setting value is Setting 1 is illustrated, but for Settings 2 to 6, it is preferable that the larger the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the CZ lottery. (The same applies to the stock time CZ judgment table).

In the normal stage (low probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 2% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ) and corresponding to watermelon. When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 1% probability of winning the CZ lottery (CZ is acquired), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113. There is a 6% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 27% probability of winning the CZ lottery ( (obtain CZ).

In addition, in the normal stage (high probability mode), if the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 13% probability that you will win the CZ lottery (obtain CZ) and win the watermelon. When the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 7% probability of winning the CZ lottery (CZ is acquired), and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113. If the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 20% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and if the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 34% probability of winning the CZ lottery. (obtain CZ).

<CZ Lottery/Stock Time>
FIG. 21(c) is a diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for CZ lottery in stock time.

In stock time (low probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 10% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ) and corresponding to watermelon. When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 5% probability of winning the CZ lottery (CZ is acquired), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113. , there is a 12% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining CZ), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 30% probability of winning the CZ lottery ( (obtain CZ). In this example, even in the same low probability mode, it is easier to win the CZ lottery (CZ is easier to obtain) in the stock time (low probability mode) than in the normal stage (low probability mode).

In addition, in stock time (high probability mode), if the symbol combination corresponding to weak cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 15% probability that you will win the CZ lottery (obtain CZ) and win the watermelon. When the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a probability of 11% to win the CZ lottery (CZ is acquired), and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113. If the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 40% probability of winning the CZ lottery (CZ is acquired), and if the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 100% probability of winning the CZ lottery. (obtain CZ). In this example, even in the same high probability mode, it is easier to win the CZ lottery (CZ is easier to obtain) in the stock time (high probability mode) than in the normal stage (high probability mode).

According to this example, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the advantageous section (high probability mode) during the stock time (first period), and increase the player's desire to play during the stock time (first period). Can be done.

<Example of transition of performance state in advantageous section>
Next, an example of transition of performance states in an advantageous section will be explained using FIG. 21(a). FIG. 21(a) is a diagram showing an example of transition of performance states in an advantageous section.

As explained using FIG. 20, in the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), if a winning combination other than a loss is won, the stock time shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section).

Note that the conditions for transitioning to stock time are not limited to this example; for example, if the conditions for transitioning from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section) are met, the transition to stock time will always occur. It may be configured as follows, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to shift to stock time, or it may be configured such that it does not shift to stock time after the RAM is cleared by changing settings etc. , it may be configured such that the transition to stock time occurs only after the start of the advantageous section after AT or bonus.

In the stock time, as shown in FIG. 21(a) (1) and (2), even if you win the CZ lottery, the state does not shift to the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed. Stock up (accumulate) CZ, perform a premonitory effect over a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game in which the player wins the CZ lottery, and win the CZ lottery in the final game of the certain period. A CZ winning announcement will be made suggesting that.

In this example, in stock time, even if you win the CZ lottery, you will not enter the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (50 games) have elapsed. The period (number of games) from when the game starts until the game changes to the CZ state differs.

On the other hand, in the normal stage, as shown in FIG. 21(a)(1), if you win the CZ lottery, the foreshadowing effect will be played for a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) starting from the game that won the CZ lottery. is executed, and in the final game of a certain period, a CZ winning announcement indicating that a CZ lottery has been won is made, and then the next game of the precursor performance immediately shifts to a CZ state (weak CZ state). Therefore, in the normal stage, the period (number of games) from winning the CZ lottery until shifting to the CZ state is the same regardless of the timing of winning the CZ lottery.

In stock time, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has passed, if you have not stocked CZ, you will move to the normal stage, and if you have stocked CZ, you will be in the CZ state. Transition to one of the weak CZ state, strong CZ state, and AT confirmed CZ state.

In this example, if one CZ is stocked before the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 21(a)(2), if two CZs are in stock, the state will shift to a strong CZ state, and if three or more CZs are in stock, Transition to AT confirmed CZ state. That is, when a plurality of CZs are stocked during the stock time, the state shifts to a strong CZ state or an AT confirmed CZ state, which is more advantageous to the player than a weak CZ state.

According to this example, a new game feature is provided in which the number of times a CZ lottery is won (how many times a certain condition is satisfied) is determined until the stock time specified number of games (first period) ends. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even after winning the CZ lottery (after a certain condition is met), the sense of anticipation can be maintained without impairing the gameplay. In addition, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming too high, and by winning the CZ lottery twice or more during the stock time specified number of games (first period) (a certain condition is met in the second number) ), the player can move to the strong CZ state (fourth gaming state) or AT confirmed CZ state (fourth gaming state), which is more advantageous than the weak CZ state (third gaming state). It can also moderately stir up expectations.

Furthermore, if the player wins an AT lottery in the CZ state that has transitioned from stock time, or if the player has transitioned from stock time to AT confirmed CZ, the game will transition to AT gaming after the CZ state ends.

Furthermore, if three or more CZs are stocked during the stock time (when an AT game is confirmed), the game will immediately move to the AT confirmed CZ state even if the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has not yet elapsed. It may be configured as follows. In addition, during stock time, in addition to the CZ lottery, an AT lottery (a lottery with a lower probability of winning than the CZ lottery) is held, and if you win the AT lottery, even if the number of games specified for the stock time (50 games) has not elapsed. , it may be configured to immediately transition to the AT state.

In addition, in the final game of stock time, a judge may be performed to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ state, regardless of the presence or absence of CZ stock, and the right to transition to the AT state (AT) during the stock time. You may stock AT instead of (or in addition to) CZ by executing an AT lottery where you can obtain it. In this case, depending on the number of AT (and/or CZ) in stock, you can move after the stock time. The performance state to be performed may be determined.

<Example of performance during stock time>
Next, an example of performance in stock time will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of performance in stock time in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 22(a) is a state in which the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 48 games.

In the same state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a stock time background image (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon) that suggests that the performance state is stock time, and also displays a stock time background image (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon). The remaining number of games (in this example, 48G) in the probability mode) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 22(b) is a state in which the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 47 games, and the player has won the CZ lottery.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (an image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (in this example, 47G) continue to be displayed, and since the player won the CZ lottery, it is indicated that the player has won the CZ lottery. They have started producing signs that suggest that.

Although there are no particular limitations on the form of the omen production, in this example, the confrontation production showing the main character Tono confronting the enemy samurai is performed for a certain period of time (in this example, 5 games) starting from the game in which he won the CZ lottery. period).

Specifically, in the premonitory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 22(b), a character string "Showdown!" is displayed, indicating that a confrontation effect has started, and then as shown in FIG. 22(c). In the second game's foreshadowing performance, the character image of the lord and the text string "It's a battle!" is displayed, and in the subsequent third game's foreshadowing performance shown in Figure (d), the character images of the lord and the samurai are displayed. Then, in the foreshadowing performance of the fourth game shown in (e) of the same figure, a confrontation scene between the master and the enemy is displayed, and in the subsequent foreshadowing performance of the fifth game shown in (f) of the same figure, the master wins against the enemy. A winning scene and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including the character string "CZ won!") are displayed to notify that the winning scene has been won in the CZ lottery.

In addition, in this example, when winning the CZ lottery, a foreshadowing performance is performed and a CZ winning notification is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a CZ winning notification is not performed in the foreshadowing performance. In some cases, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to notify the CZ winning. Furthermore, there may be cases where no omen effect is performed. Furthermore, at least a portion of the effect before the CZ winning notification (for example, background image for stock time) and the effect after the CZ winning notification may be made different.

The state shown in FIG. 22(g) is a state in which the remaining number of games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 46 games.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (an image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (46G in this example) continue to be displayed, as well as the fact that you won the CZ lottery and stocked one CZ. , a CZ stock icon SI indicating that CZ has been stocked is displayed.

In this example, the number of remaining games in the stock time is not subtracted during the harbinger effect, but the number of remaining games may be subtracted even during the harbinger effect. Furthermore, even if the player wins the CZ lottery, the CZ stock icon SI may be configured not to be displayed, and in this case, the foreshadow effect may not be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 22(h) is the final game state of stock time (low probability mode), and the subsequent state shown in FIG. 22(i) is the state of transition from stock time (low probability mode) to the CZ state. It is.

In this example, since one CZ was stocked during the stock time (low probability mode), after transitioning to the weak CZ state, in the weak CZ state, the CZ transition notification ( In this example, a weak CZ background image (in this example, an image of the sea and a sandy beach) indicating that the production state is a weak CZ state is displayed. ) is displayed.

Further, in this example, an example of a performance in stock time (low probability mode) is shown, but in stock time (high probability mode), for example, a performance as shown in FIG. 22(j) is performed.

In the stock time (high probability mode) performance, a background image for stock time (an image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (48G in this example) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a background image HD for high probability mode (in this example, a plurality of character strings of "high probability") indicating that the CZ lottery is in high probability mode is displayed. (band-shaped image).

The background image HD for high probability mode is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap with both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (at a predetermined distance from both ends). In this case, it is preferable that the display of 48G) be displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the background image HD for high probability mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the high probability mode feel special, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation during the stock time (first period). In addition to being able to make the high probability mode background image HD stand out, the high probability mode background image HD does not obstruct the visibility of other images (display of the number of remaining games, etc.).

<Example of production on normal stage>
Next, an example of the production on the normal stage will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of production on the normal stage in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 23(a) is a normal stage (low probability mode) state. In the same state, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a background image for a normal stage (in this example, an image of the inside of the castle) indicating that the production state is a normal stage.

The state shown in FIG. 23(b) is a normal stage (low probability mode) state, and is a state in which the player has won the CZ lottery.

In the same state, the normal stage background image (image of the castle interior) continues to be displayed, and since the player has won the CZ lottery, a foreshadowing effect indicating that the player has won the CZ lottery is started.

Although there are no particular limitations on the form of the omen production, in this example, similar to stock time, the confrontation production showing the main character Tono confronting the enemy samurai will be performed for a certain period (main) from the game in which he won the CZ lottery. In the example, this is executed over a period of 5 games.

Specifically, in the first game's foreshadowing performance shown in FIG. 23(b), a character string "Showdown!" is displayed, indicating that the confrontation performance has started, and then as shown in FIG. 23(c). In the second game's foreshadowing performance, the character image of the lord and the text string "It's a battle!" is displayed, and in the subsequent third game's foreshadowing performance shown in Figure (d), the character images of the lord and the samurai are displayed. Then, in the foreshadowing performance of the fourth game shown in (e) of the same figure, a confrontation scene between the master and the enemy is displayed, and in the subsequent foreshadowing performance of the fifth game shown in (f) of the same figure, the master wins against the enemy. A winning scene and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including the character string "CZ won!") are displayed to notify that the winning scene has been won in the CZ lottery.

In addition, if two CZs were stocked at the stock time, the system was configured to shift to a strong CZ state, but even in the normal stage, a CZ lottery is held in the foreshadowing performance after winning a CZ, and the CZ lottery is won. In this case, the configuration may be such that the state shifts to a strong CZ state, similar to the case where two CZs are stocked.

The state shown in FIG. 23(g) is a state in which the normal stage (low probability mode) has transitioned to the CZ state.

In this example, since the player wins the CZ lottery in the normal stage (low probability mode), the player immediately moves to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game with the omen effect, and then shifts to the CZ state in the weak CZ state. In addition to displaying a CZ transition notification (in this example, an image containing the character string "Entering CZ!") indicating that the production state is a weak CZ state, a weak CZ background image (main In the example, an image of the sea and a sandy beach) is displayed.

Further, in this example, an example of the effect in the normal stage (low probability mode) is shown, but in the normal stage (high probability mode), for example, the effect shown in FIG. 23(h) is performed.

In the production of the normal stage (high probability mode), in addition to displaying the background image for the normal stage (image of the castle interior) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, A high probability mode background image HD (in this example, a band-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "high probability") indicating that the CZ lottery is in the high probability mode is displayed.

Note that the high probability mode background image HD is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (at a position a predetermined distance from both ends).

In addition, in this example, the background image for normal stage (image inside the castle) and the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) are different images, but they may be the same image, and in this case, Only the high probability mode for the stage and stock time may be the same image, and the low probability mode for the normal stage and stock time may be different images, or vice versa.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine) has a control means that can set one game state from a plurality of game states (for example, A main control unit 300 and a first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. A second gaming state (for example, the CZ state and AT state shown in FIG. 20) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state is included, and the control means It is possible to set the second gaming state based on a certain condition being met (for example, winning the CZ lottery), and the control means is configured to set the second gaming state based on the establishment of a certain condition (for example, winning the CZ lottery), Even if the certain condition is satisfied during the stock time of 50 games shown in (a), the second gaming state is not set during the first period, and the second gaming state is not set during the first period. This gaming machine is characterized in that the second gaming state is set after the end of the period.

According to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if a certain condition is satisfied, the game does not shift to the second game state until the first period ends, so that the game machine cannot be played for a long period of time in the first period. It is possible to enjoy the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, it is provided with operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1), and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, a normal section shown in FIG. 20), the first game state, and the An advantageous state including a second gaming state (for example, an advantageous section shown in FIG. 20) is included, and is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation), and the advantageous state is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation). The state may be more advantageous than the normal state in terms of notification, and when the normal state is shifted to the advantageous state, the state may be shifted to the first period.

With such a configuration, when the state shifts to an advantageous state, the period shifts to the first period, so it is possible to maintain the feeling of expectation from the previous advantageous state, and when the state shifts from the normal state to the advantageous state. , it is possible to avoid a situation where too many balls are rolled out in a short period of time, resulting in an unnecessarily high level of gambling.

Further, the first period may be a period in which the certain condition is more easily satisfied than the second period (a certain period excluding the first period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the first period feel more special than the second period, and it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the first period.

Further, the first period may include a normal period (e.g., low probability mode) and an advantageous period (e.g., high probability mode) in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal period. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation for an advantageous period (high probability mode) in the first period, and it is possible to increase the player's desire to play in the first period. In addition, a certain period (second period) other than the first period includes a normal period (for example, a period in which the probability of winning a CZ lottery or an AT lottery is relatively low) and a certain period other than the normal period. An advantageous period in which conditions are likely to be met (for example, a period in which the probability of winning a CZ lottery or an AT lottery is relatively high) may be included.

Furthermore, the effects executed during the normal period and the effects executed during the advantageous period have at least some different effects (for example, in the high probability mode, the high probability mode background shown in FIG. 22(j) It may be an image HD (displaying a band-shaped image with a plurality of character strings of "high precision").

With this configuration, it is possible to make the advantageous section (high probability mode) feel special, and it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation in the first period.

Further, even if the certain condition is satisfied during the first period, the certain condition may be satisfied during the first period after the certain condition is satisfied. It's okay.

With such a configuration, even if a certain condition is met, the second gaming state will not be entered until the first period ends, so if a certain condition is met early in the first period Even in the case of a game, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like a loss, and it is possible to maintain the player's desire to play.

Further, the second gaming state includes a third gaming state (for example, a weak CZ state) and a fourth gaming state that is more advantageous than the third gaming state (for example, a strong CZ state, an AT confirmed CZ state). state), and if the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is a first number (for example, once), the third gaming state is executed after the end of the first period. and if the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is a second number (for example, 2 or more times), the fourth gaming state is set after the first period ends. It may be something.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new gameplay feature in which the number of times a certain condition is satisfied before the first period ends, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, even after a certain condition is met, the sense of anticipation can be maintained without impairing the gameplay. In addition, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high, and if a second number of certain conditions are satisfied during the first period, the game will move to a fourth gaming state that is more advantageous than the third gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to moderately arouse the expectations of the players.

<<Embodiment 2>>
A gaming machine (slot machine) according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and this strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112 (see FIG. 27). ). From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in approximately three vertical directions from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, making a total of nine symbols visible. There is.

By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) consisting of a light emitter and a light receiver is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light part and the light receiving part. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 indicates, for example, that a specific winning combination (specifically, special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2) has been internally won in an internal lottery to be described later, or that a bonus game is being played (special winning combination 1 or 2 game). This is a lamp that informs the player that the game is currently in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The performance button 156 is an operation means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the button is configured to be pressed and operated by the player, and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects are not limited to buttons, but may be configured with levers, touch panels, etc., or may include a plurality of operating means.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals that will be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a press order effect. In this example, the stored coin count display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout coin count display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "first stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop operation. operation (hereinafter also referred to as "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop").

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or press order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) left → center → right operation order (left center right or LCR), (2) left → right → center operation order (left center center or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation order ( (center left/right or CLR), (4) center → right → left operation order (center right left or CRL), (5) right → left → center operation order (right left center or RLC), (6) right → center → left There are six types of operation orders (right-center-left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided at the top of the presentation device 160.

This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (production image display device), and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player side). It becomes.

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Additionally, inside the main body 101, there are setting keys that can be turned on and off by rotation, and operations for changing settings (setting value change operation) and checking settings by pressing. There is a setting switch that allows you to The setting key is an operation means for starting to change or check the setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6), and the setting switch can set one of the multiple setting values. This is one of the setting methods.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of a winning line of the slot machine 100.

As explained using FIG. 24, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112. A total of nine patterns are visible.

Specifically, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) are the left reel upper row symbol and the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; symbol position 1). The symbols displayed on the left reel 110 (position 3; also referred to as symbol position 3) are referred to as the left reel middle symbols, and the symbols displayed on the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) are referred to as the left reel lower symbols.

In addition, the symbol displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 4) is the middle reel upper row symbol, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 5). ) is called a middle reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed at the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is called a middle reel lower row symbol.

In addition, the symbols displayed in the upper row of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 7) are the right reel upper row symbols, and the symbols displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 8). ) is referred to as the right reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed in the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 9) is referred to as the right reel lower row symbol.

In the present embodiment, the winning line is a middle winning line L1 (hereinafter simply referred to as a winning line) consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8). ) is provided.

Here, the winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbols that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 113, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, which will be explained using FIGS. 28 and 29, is displayed. This is the line on which it is determined whether or not the lines have been completed (or not). The valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-copy bet-only machine, and when the number of medals inserted is less than three, none of the winning lines become valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 becomes effective. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

Hereinafter, in the symbol display window 113, symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 on the winning line L1 are "winning positions", and other symbol positions, that is, symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 are "non-winning positions". Sometimes referred to as "winning position". That is, the winning position refers to the position on the winning line where the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stop.

Note that the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the winning line L1, there is an upper winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel upper symbols, and right reel upper symbols, and a left reel lower symbol, middle reel lower symbols, and right reel lower symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the lower winning lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of medals bet may be set as valid winning lines.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 26. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. A ROM 306 for storing position, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random value generation circuit 316 (this circuit has two built-in random value generation circuits) that derives a value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time it receives a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315a. ) and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 Start game control (start main control section main processing described later).

Random value generation circuit 316 generates random values used in basic circuit 302. There are two types of methods for generating random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316: a counter mode and a random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two additional methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to use a random value seed to perform an operation according to a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function), and derive the result of this operation as a random number value. The second method is to read a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derive the read numerical value as a random numerical value. The random value generation circuit 316 uses white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320 to obtain irregular values. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the obtained value as the initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the reading start position of the random number table. use

The main control unit 300 is also equipped with a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 controls various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and an optical system for the reel 110. The state of the sensor, optical sensor of the reel 111, optical sensor of the reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and are used to insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation when The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of reel 110, the optical sensor of reel 111, and the optical sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 that selects the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided in the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 is connected to an external hall computer (not shown) etc. via this information output circuit 334. Gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. , this basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling backlight lighting patterns, various displays, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. It is connected.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 includes a shutter sensor 428 that can detect the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface, and a press operation of the production button 156. is connected to a production button sensor 430 that can detect. The CPU 404 monitors the states of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157 (hereinafter also referred to as "liquid crystal display device 157"). Note that the second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157, a control unit that controls various production drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured with a plurality of control units, such as.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 27. Note that FIG. 27 is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (in this embodiment, 9 types) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. . Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has a "watermelon symbol," the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a "bell symbol," and the number 0 piece on the right reel 112 has a "replay symbol." ” are arranged respectively.

<Type of winning role>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 28. In addition, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations, the name of the condition device, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts, and notes.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special prizes (special prize 1, special prize 2), general prizes (replayed prizes 1 to 3, small prizes 1 to 5), and the like. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted, and some of the winning combinations are omitted from illustration in FIG. 28.

<Types of winning roles/special roles>
Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, special combination 1 and special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Furthermore, the replay combination is a combination that allows replay without inserting new medals (a combination to which replay is granted). These winning combinations are sometimes called "actuation combinations."

In addition, "winning" in this embodiment includes cases where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the winning line; for example, special winning combination 1, This includes winning the special winning combination 2 and the replay winning combination.

Special role 1 and special role 2 are winning roles in which the gaming state shifts to the special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) due to internal winning, and the gaming state changes to the special role 1/2 gaming state (RT4) due to winning. It is. In addition, when medals exceeding the specified number (for example, 200) are paid out in the special role 1/2 gaming state (RT4), the gaming state shifts to a low replay probability state (RT1). Note that each gaming state (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combinations that correspond to Special Role 1 (BB) are "Seven 1 symbol - Seven 1 symbol - Seven 1 symbol" or "Seven 2 symbol - Seven 2 symbol - Seven 2 symbol", and for Special Role 2 (RB). The corresponding symbol combination is "BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol".

When the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the special winning internal winning flag corresponding to this internally winning winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag remains on until the internally won winning combination is won, and it becomes easier to win the internally winning winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, in a game where the special role 1 or 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role will be All together, it will be easier to win.

<Types of winning roles/replaying roles>
Re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 are winning combinations (activation combinations) that allow players to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize, and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. Note that the replay combination may be any combination that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when winning a re-game winning combination, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of inserted medals is reset in the storage area for the number of inserted medals), or when winning a re-gaming winning combination It may also be possible to carry over the medals inserted in the next game and use them as they are in the next game.

<Types of winning roles/small roles>
Small winning combinations 1 to 5 are winning winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a number of medals to be paid out) upon winning.

Small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which, upon winning, a symbol combination of "watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern - watermelon pattern" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1, and five medals are paid out.

Small winning combination 2 (Cherry) is a winning winning combination in which the symbol combination "Cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and two medals are paid out. The symbol combination "Cherry symbol - ANY-ANY" indicates that the symbol on the left reel 110 only needs to be the "cherry symbol", and the symbols on the middle reel 111 and right reel 112 can be any symbol. .

Hereinafter, these small roles 1 (Watermelon) and 2 (Cherry) may be collectively referred to as "rare roles," but rare roles are not limited to these winning roles, and may be It may be one of the winning combinations, or other winning combinations may be added.

In addition, if a rare combination is won in the AT state described later, a lottery is executed to add the number of games or the number of sets (making it easier to win the lottery). On the other hand, even if a rare combination is won in the ED state, a lottery for adding the number of games or the number of sets is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, the small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) is composed of six types of winning combinations, small winning combinations 3a to 3f. In this example, one of the winning combinations of small winning combinations 3a to 3f is internally won by lottery with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/6 in this example, common to all settings), and the stop button is stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139. If the order of operations (press order) matches the correct press order corresponding to the internally won winning combination, a prize is won and 12 medals are paid out (details will be described later using FIG. 29).

For small winning combination 4 (common bell), the symbol combination of "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is placed on the winning line L1, regardless of the operation order (press order) or operation timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139. This is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed and 12 medals are paid out.

In the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning), the symbol combination of "Replay symbol - Replay symbol - Blank 1 symbol" is the winning line L1, regardless of the operation order (press order) or operation timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139. This is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed above and one medal is paid out.

<Small role 3 (press order bell) and AT game>
Next, using FIG. 29(a) and FIG. 29(b), the relationship between the small winning combination 3 (press order bell) and the AT game will be explained.

In addition, FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and notes corresponding to the small role 3 (press order bell) and the small role 5 (1-card role), and the same figure (b) is a diagram showing the small role It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) is internally won and an AT game.

Small role 3 (press order bell) is small role 3a (press order bell LCR), small role 3b (press order bell RLC), small role 3c (press order bell CRL), small role 3d (press order bell LRC), It consists of six types of winning combinations: small winning combination 3e (pressing order bell CLR) and small winning combination 3f (pressing order bell RCL).

If the small winning combination 3 (press order bell) is won internally, which symbol combination will be stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 or not, depending on the order of stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139, and AT It is determined whether the game will be advantageous or disadvantageous.

Details will be described later, but in this example, among the six types of push order bells of small winning combinations 3a to 3f, small winning combinations 3b (pressing order bell RLC), small winning combinations 3c (pressing order bell CRL), and small winning combinations 3e (Press order bell CLR), small winning combination 3f (Push order bell RCL), 12 medals are paid out when the stop operation is performed according to the irregular press which is the correct operation order. Therefore, if you win the small prize 3 (press order bell) internally and perform the stop operation according to the irregular press, you will win the small prize (press order bell) with a probability of 4/6, and stop according to the irregular press. A game in which the operation is performed is a "high base game" in which the number of medals acquired is relatively large.

On the other hand, in this example, among the six types of push order bells of small winning combinations 3a to 3f, the small winning combination 3a (pressing order bell LCR) is stopped when the stop operation is performed according to the correct operation order. Twelve medals are paid out, and 12 medals are paid out when the small winning combination 3d (press order bell LRC) is stopped according to the correct operation order of scissor hitting. Therefore, if you win the small prize 3 (press order bell) internally, if you perform the stop operation according to the order push or scissors hit, you will win the small prize (press order bell) with a probability of 2/6, and A game in which a stop operation is performed according to a push or a scissor hit is a "low base game" in which the number of medals acquired is relatively small.

Below, six types of small winnings 3a to 3f will be specifically explained.

<Small role 3a (press order bell LCR)>
When the small winning combination 3a (pressing order bell LCR) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR)) , the symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3a (press order bell LCR) is internally won, and according to the predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, scissors hit (LRC)) among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order. When the stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3a (press order bell LCR) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, CRL, When a stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

Here, "AT games become disadvantageous" refers to "making the ease of acquiring game value in AT games disadvantageous for some players", for example, when a player performs a stop operation by pressing an irregular button in a normal game. In the game, the AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of AT games is reduced, the initial number of games and the probability of winning an AT are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular presses, and a points lottery is conducted every game. , If you make an irregular press on a game machine that determines AT performance according to the points, the point lottery will be disadvantageous, and in normal games where you perform a stop operation with an irregular press, the probability of winning the AT lottery will be lowered. , lowering the frequency of execution of operation navigation in AT games, not executing set continuation lottery in AT games, lowering the winning probability of set continuation lottery in AT games, etc. On the other hand, "AT games become advantageous" refers to "making it easier for players to acquire gaming value in AT games".

As described above, in this example, when the small role 3 is internally won, the AT game becomes advantageous if you perform the forward push (LCR) or the scissors hit (LRC), and when the small role 3 is internally won, the irregular push (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL) makes the AT game disadvantageous, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the small winning combination 3 is internally won, If you perform LCR) or scissors hit (LRC), the advantage of AT game will not change, and if you win internally for small role 3, if you perform an irregular push (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL), AT game will change. You can make it disadvantageous, or if you win internally for small role 3, if you press forward (LCR) or hit scissors (LRC), AT game becomes advantageous, and if you win internally for small role 3, it is irregular. The advantage of the AT game may not change if a push is made (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL).

<Small role 3b (Press order bell RLC)>
When the small winning combination 3b (pressing order bell RLC) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (RLC)) , the symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3b (press order bell RLC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3b (press order bell RLC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, CRL, If a stop operation is performed according to any one of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3c (press order bell CRL)>
When the small role 3c (press order bell CRL) is internally won among the small role 3 (press order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular press (CRL)) , the symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3c (press order bell CRL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3c (press order bell CRL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, RLC, If a stop operation is performed according to any one of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3d (Oshijun Bell LRC)>
When the small winning combination 3d (pressing order bell LRC) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, scissors hitting (LRC)) , the symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3d (press order bell LRC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, according to the predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR)) When the stop operation is performed, symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3d (press order bell LRC) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CLR, CRL, When a stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. becomes.

<Small role 3e (press order bell CLR)>
When the small winning combination 3e (pressing order bell CLR) is internally won from the small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (CLR)) , the symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3e (press order bell CLR) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3e (press order bell CLR) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CRL, RLC, If a stop operation is performed according to any one of RCL)), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous. .

<Small role 3f (Push order bell RCL)>
When the small winning combination 3f (pressing order bell RCL) is internally won among the small winning combinations 3 (pressing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct operation order (in this example, irregular pressing (RCL)) , the symbol combination "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" is displayed in a stopped state, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3f (press order bell RCL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, order press (LCR) or scissors When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the strike (LRC), symbol combinations other than "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3f (press order bell RCL) is internally won, and among the multiple incorrect operation orders other than the correct operation order, a predetermined incorrect operation order (in this example, irregular presses (CRL, CLR, If a stop operation is performed according to any of the RLC), symbol combinations other than "Bell symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and AT games become disadvantageous. .

In addition, in this example, if the small winning combinations 3a to 3f are internally won and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect operation order, one medal is paid out, but the number of medals paid out is as follows. The number is not limited to one, but may be zero, or may be one or more as long as it is less than the 12 coins paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order.

<Small role 5 (1 role)>
Next, using FIGS. 29(a) and 29(c), the relationship between the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) and the setting suggestion performance A will be explained.

In addition, FIG. 29(a) is a diagram showing the symbol combinations, payout numbers, and notes corresponding to the small role 3 (press order bell) and the small role 5 (1-card role), and the same figure (c) is a diagram showing the small role It is a diagram showing the relationship between the pressing order of stop buttons 137 to 139 in a game in which winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won and setting suggestion performance A.

If the small winning combination 5 (1 card winning) is internally won, the small winning 5 (1 card winning) will be won regardless of the order (pressing order) or timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139. One medal is paid out, but it is determined whether or not setting suggestion effect A can be executed depending on the order of stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139.

A specific example is when the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor hitting (LRC)). In this case, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, and the setting suggestion performance A becomes executable.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)). In this case, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is won and one medal is paid out, but the setting suggestion performance A is not executed.

In addition, in this example, when the small role 5 (one-card role) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the irregular press, setting suggestion performance A becomes impossible to execute. If 5 (1 card role) is internally won, the operation navigation will be displayed, and if a stop operation is performed that does not follow the operation navigation (when a stop operation is performed that ignores the operation navigation), setting suggestion performance A will be displayed. may be configured so that it is not executable.

In addition, in this example, if the small winning combination 5 is won internally and the stop operation is performed with an irregular press, one medal is paid out, but the number of medals paid out is not limited to one. It may be set to 0.

Here, the setting suggestion performance is a performance that suggests the currently set setting values (in this example, settings 1 to 6) using performance elements in the slot machine 100, and is a setting suggestion performance that will be described later. Production A and setting suggestion production B are one type of setting suggestion production.

The production elements used for the setting suggestion production are not particularly limited, but may include, for example, a display by a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24) or a display from a sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26). The sound output, the light output from the light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, the lamps such as the side lamps 144 shown in FIG. 24), and the movable body (for example, the This includes the movement (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement) of the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG.

In this example, if the stop operation is performed in an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, an irregular press), setting suggestion performance A becomes impossible to execute. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting suggestion is more effective than when the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor hitting (LRC)). The performance A may be executed less frequently.

In addition, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is the same as when the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor hitting (LRC)), but the setting suggestion effect is Among them, the frequency of execution of effects that definitively suggest a setting value (e.g., effects that include a display such as "Setting 5 confirmed") will be lower (effects that vaguely suggest a setting value (e.g., "Setting 5? Setting 6") will be executed less frequently. ?” may be executed more frequently).

In addition, the execution frequency of setting suggestion performance A is lower than when the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor hitting (LRC)), and The frequency of execution of effects that definitively suggest setting values may also be lowered.

<Types of RT-type gaming states>
Next, the types and transitions of RT-based gaming states in the slot machine 100 will be explained.

<Low replay probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is the default RT-type gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as "normal gaming state") that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is powered on, and is a This is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous compared to other gaming states.

In this example, in this low re-gaming probability state (RT1), when re-gaming combination 2 (promotion replay 1) or re-gaming combination 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, the re-gaming high probability state (RT2) described below is entered. to move to. Further, in this re-gaming low probability state (RT1), if the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is won internally, the state shifts to the special winning combination 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The re-gaming high probability state is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of re-gaming is higher than the re-gaming low probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this re-gaming high probability state (RT2), when special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is internally won, the state shifts to special winning combination 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special role 1 and 2 internal winning status (RT3)>
The special prize 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to special prize 1 or special prize 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In this example, when a special prize 1 or special prize 2 is won in this special prize 1/2 internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) to be described later.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all the gaming states. In this example, in the special gaming state (RT4), when a specified number of coins (for example, 200 coins) are paid out, the state shifts to the low re-gaming probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special gaming state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may include, for example, when a predetermined role is won internally, when a predetermined number of prizes (e.g., 8) are won, or when a predetermined prize is won. This may be the case where the game has been played a number of times (for example, six times).

<Transition of AT system game state>
Next, the AT system game state will be explained.

The AT system gaming state is broadly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that operation navigation will be executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, or a normal section. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode or an advantageous section.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the stop operation mode (for example, correct operation order and stop operation timing) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to obtain medals and maintain an advantageous gaming state. , an effect that notifies the correct operation order of a pressing order winning combination (for example, small winning combination 3 (pressing order bell LCR)) (for example, an effect that displays characters "left → middle → right"), etc.

If a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation contents of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is brought to the player, so the high navigation state is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, advantageous specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a predetermined period of time. It means that the ratio, so-called payout rate (ball output rate), is advantageous.

Note that in this example, the low navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state where the probability of executing operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. The state where operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be changed to the state where operation navigation is executed.

Each AT system game state is subdivided and managed, and this is called a performance state. In detail, the performance states in the low navigation state include the normal gaming state, and the performance states in the high navigation state include the normal state, confirmed notification state, judge state, pullback state, AT1 state, AT2 state, and ED (ending) state. There is. Note that the AT1 state, AT2 state, and ED state are states in which the number of balls produced increases in principle.

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state of the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than a loss), the game shifts to the normal gaming state of the high navigation state. After that, for example, the transition occurs in the order of confirmed notification state → AT1 state → Judge state, and from this judge state via the pullback state to the normal gaming state or AT2 state, or directly from the judge state, AT2 There are routes etc. to transition to the state.

The AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a state in which AT games can be played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games in one set), and is more effective than the normal gaming state with low navigation state or the normal state with high navigation state. This is an advantageous situation for the player.

In this AT game, in the starting game of the AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game, and if this set continuation lottery is won, an additional number of predetermined times will be drawn. (In this example, 30 games per set) AT games are provided, and the AT state is extended. Further, when the conditions for transition to the normal gaming state are satisfied in the AT state (in this example, when all games in the AT state are played), the next game will be shifted to the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), the state shifts to the ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) effect indicating the end of the high navigation state is executed. Ru.

Note that the condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to the remaining games in the high navigation state being less than or equal to a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games); for example, the predetermined number of games may be more than or less than 20 games. , "number of acquired coins + expected difference in number of acquired coins>2000".

<Setting suggestion production A>
Next, setting suggestion effect A will be explained using FIG. 30. FIG. 30(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and low probability mode of setting suggestion performance A.

In this example, in the advantageous section, the small winning combination 5 (1-card winning combination) is internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on), and the predetermined operation order (in this example, (LCR) or scissors strike (LRC)) when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped, a setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed using a setting suggestion effect A selection table, which will be described later. The setting suggestion effect A becomes executable.

Further, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion performance A by the setting suggestion performance A lottery, a suggestion performance suggesting that the setting suggestion performance A will be executed is executed in the game in which the lottery was executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, when the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on), the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won, and the operating order other than the predetermined operating order (in this example, Irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)) If the stop button 137 to 139 is stopped, setting suggestion performance A lottery will not be executed, so setting suggestion performance A or setting suggestion performance A will not be executed. Any suggestion that suggests that will be carried out will not be carried out.

In this example, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won, and the stop button 137 is pressed in a predetermined order of operations (in this example, sequential pressing (LCR) or scissor hitting (LRC)). An example will be shown in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed when the stop operation of ~139 is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and internally winning winning combinations other than small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination), In addition, it may be executed when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in a predetermined order of operations, or a predetermined winning combination (for example, 1 It may be executed when a prize is won (such as when a medal is won), or when a predetermined number of medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, when a certain number of medals are paid out by pressing an irregular button). (e.g., when a number of medals have been paid out).

Also, if the small role 5 (1-card role) is internally won and the stop operation is performed by pressing sequentially (LCR) or scissors hitting (LRC), one medal will be paid out, and the small role 5 will be internally won and the irregular press When the stop operation is performed, the medals may not be paid out, and it may be determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A lottery based on the number of medals paid out when the small winning combination 5 is internally won.

In other words, the conditions for executing the setting suggestion performance A lottery may be that the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won and one medal is paid out.

There are two types of setting suggestion performance A lottery in this example: a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the execution probability of setting suggestion performance A is higher than the low probability mode.

The starting conditions for the low probability mode and the high probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. , a high probability mode with a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) is set. In this high probability mode, if a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) elapse without the setting suggestion performance A being executed, the mode shifts to the low probability mode from the next game. On the other hand, in the high probability mode, if setting suggestion effect A is executed before the predetermined number of games (10 games) has elapsed (in this example, the 8th game), the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the game in which setting suggestion effect A is executed. Shift to low probability mode from the next game.

Conventionally, when the AT state, ED state, etc. end, the transition immediately goes from the high navigation state (advantageous section) to the high navigation state (advantageous section) via the low navigation state (normal section). Many players end the game immediately when they change from a low navigation state (regular section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section), but according to this example, when they change from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state ( By providing a high-probability mode period in which the execution probability of setting suggestion effects is high, which is different from the low-probability mode period, when the navigation mode shifts from a low navigation state (normal section) to a high navigation state (advantageous section). ), it can be made difficult to immediately end the game (immediately quit), and the operating rate can be improved.

The conditions for setting the high-probability mode are not particularly limited. For example, the high-probability mode may be set if you lose in a confrontation performance, or if you fail in a CZ or omen performance (or if you win a bonus or AT). The high probability mode may be set if the player wins a predetermined winning combination, or the high probability mode may be set if the player wins a lottery. You may.

<Setting suggestion effect A selection table>
FIG. 30(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion performance A selection table used for the setting suggestion performance A lottery.

The setting suggestion performance A lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance A, and if so, the content of the performance of the setting suggestion performance A. In this example, if it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A by the lottery, after executing the suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A will be executed in the game in which the lottery was executed, In the next game, setting suggestion effect A is executed.

Note that the game in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed is not limited to the game following the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery was executed, but may be the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery was executed, or a game after the next game. It may be a game of. Furthermore, the game that executes the suggestion effect that suggests that setting suggestion effect A is to be executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed, and may be any game that is executed before setting suggestion effect A is executed.

Among the "effect contents" in the setting suggestion effect A selection table shown in FIG. The content of performance A is shown.

In setting suggestion performance A, among multiple types of performance elements, display by display means (in this example, liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24) and sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26) are used. ) is used to produce effects.

Note that there may be multiple types of performance elements used in the setting suggestion performance A, such as display by display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24), sound output means (for example, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 26, 277), light output from a light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24), or a movable body (for example, The movements (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement) of the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 24 can be arbitrarily combined.

The production content "even number suggestion image" is a setting suggestion production A that displays an image on the LCD that suggests that the setting value may be an even number (in this example, setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6). This is an effect that is displayed on the display device 157 and outputs a sound from the speakers 272 and 277 that suggests that the set value may be an even number.

The production content "odd number suggestion image" is a setting suggestion production A that displays an image on the LCD that suggests that the setting value may be an odd number (in this example, setting 1, setting 3, or setting 5). This is an effect that is displayed on the display device 157 and outputs a sound from the speakers 272 and 277 that suggests that the set value may be an odd number.

The production content "high setting suggestion image" displays, as setting suggestion production A, an image that suggests that the setting value may be a high setting (in this example, setting 5 or setting 6) on the liquid crystal display device 157. This is an effect in which the speakers 272 and 277 output a sound indicating that the setting value may be set to a high value.

The effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is an image that suggests that the setting value is confirmed to be an even number (in this example, setting 2, setting 4, or setting 6) as setting suggestion effect A. is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a sound indicating that the set value is determined to be an even number is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The production content "4 or more confirmed image" indicates that the setting value is confirmed to be 4 or more (in this example, setting 4, setting 5, or setting 6) as setting suggestion production A. This is an effect in which an image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and a sound indicating that the set value is determined to be 4 or higher is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "5 or more confirmed image" is a setting suggestion effect A that displays an image that suggests that the setting value is confirmed to be 5 or more (in this example, setting 5 or setting 6) on the LCD display. This is an effect that is displayed on the device 157 and outputs a sound from the speakers 272 and 277 that suggests that the set value is determined to be 5 or higher.

The production content "6 confirmed image" displays, as setting suggestion production A, an image that suggests that the setting value is confirmed to be setting 6 on the liquid crystal display device 157, and also displays an image that suggests that the setting value is set to setting 6. This is an effect in which the speakers 272 and 277 output a sound that suggests that something is certain.

Note that the content of the setting suggestion effect is not limited to this example, and includes, for example, an effect that vaguely suggests a setting value (for example, an effect that includes a display or sound such as "Setting 5? Setting 6?"), It may be an effect that suggests a range (for example, an effect that includes a display or sound such as "Settings 2 to 4"), or the like.

<Setting suggestion effect A/low probability mode>
In the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect A, the lottery data corresponding to the low probability mode in the setting suggestion effect A selection table is referred to, and based on the current setting value, whether or not to execute setting suggestion effect A is determined. If so, the content of the setting suggestion performance A is determined.

For example, when the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and setting suggestion effect A is not executed. If the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 99% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" will be selected. Execute setting suggestion effect A.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 98% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" will be selected. The setting suggestion performance A is executed, and the setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "4 or more confirmed images" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 98% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "4 or more confirmed images" will be selected. The setting suggestion performance A is executed, and the setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "5 or more confirmed images" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 96% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" will be selected. Execute setting suggestion effect A, with a 1% probability, execute setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "4 or more confirmed images", and with a 1% probability, execute setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "5 or more confirmed images" Then, with a probability of 1%, setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "6 confirmed images" is executed.

<Setting suggestion production A/high probability mode>
In the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A, the content of the effect of the setting suggestion effect A is determined based on the current setting value by referring to the lottery data corresponding to the high probability mode in the setting suggestion effect A selection table. Note that in the high probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% for all settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect A is always executed.

If the current setting value is setting 1, there is a 47% probability that setting suggestion effect A for the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 47% probability will execute the setting suggestion effect for the production content "odd number suggestion image". Performance A is executed, and setting suggestion performance A of the performance content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with a probability of 6%.

If the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 56% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 38% probability that the setting suggestion effect will be executed with the production content "odd number suggestion image". Performance A is executed, setting suggestion performance A with performance content ``high setting suggestion image'' is executed with a probability of 5%, and setting suggestion performance A with performance content ``even number setting confirmed image'' is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 3, there is a 37% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 55% probability that the setting suggestion effect will be executed with the production content "odd number suggestion image". Performance A is executed, and setting suggestion performance A of the performance content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with a probability of 8%.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 54% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 34% probability that the setting suggestion effect of the production content "odd number suggestion image" will be executed. Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 8%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" with a 3% probability, A setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "4 or more confirmed images" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 31% probability that the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 58% probability that the setting suggestion effect will be executed with the effect content "odd number suggestion image". Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 9%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" with a 1% probability, A setting suggestion performance A with the performance content "5 or more confirmed images" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 51% probability that setting suggestion effect A for the effect content "even number suggestion image" will be executed, and a 29% probability will be used to execute the setting suggestion effect for the production content "odd number suggestion image". Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 10%, execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" with a 5% probability, There is a 2% probability to execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "4 or more confirmed images", a 2% probability to execute the setting suggestion effect A with the effect content "5 or more confirmed images", and a 1% probability to execute the setting suggestion effect A. Execute setting suggestion effect A with the content "6 confirmed images".

As mentioned above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the high probability mode, compared to the low probability mode, effects that vaguely suggest the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", " This means that the execution probability of "high setting suggestion image") is high. By doing so, even in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play the game over a long period of time.

In addition, in the low probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so if it is executed, an effect that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", "high setting suggestion image") will be executed. By lowering the probability, it is possible to prevent the setting value from becoming too difficult to guess.

The second feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. There are several points. By doing this, when executed in the low probability mode where the execution probability itself is extremely low, an effect that gives a good impression will be executed (in the case of settings 4 to 6, the effect that gives a better impression will be executed). (because there is a possibility that the game will be executed), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to encourage him or her to play the game for a long period of time.

Note that the selection probabilities shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example are just an example, and are not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in settings 1 to 3 of low probability mode, it was not supposed to be executed, but it can be set to be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always supposed to be executed, but it is not executed. You can make it happen.

<Setting suggestion production B>
Next, setting suggestion effect B will be explained using FIG. 31. FIG. 31(a) is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high probability mode and low probability mode of setting suggestion effect B.

In this example, in the AT state or ED state of the advantageous section, a rare winning combination (in this example, small winning combination 1 (watermelon) or small winning combination 2 (cherry)) is selected by an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). In the case of internal winning, regardless of the operation order (pressing order) or operation timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139, by executing the setting suggestion effect B lottery using the setting suggestion effect B selection table described later. , setting suggestion effect B becomes executable.

There are two types of setting suggestion performance B lottery in this example: a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the execution probability of setting suggestion performance B is higher than the low probability mode.

Although the starting conditions for the low probability mode and the high probability mode are not particularly limited, in this example, as shown in FIG. In the state game, a high probability mode is set. Therefore, in this example, the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effect B in the ED state is higher than the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effect B in the AT state. Note that the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect B in the AT state may be set to 0%, and the configuration may be such that the setting suggestion effect B is not executed in the AT state.

In addition, in this example, the execution period of the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance B (in this example, 20 games + α) is at least longer than the execution period of the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance A (10 games in this example). It is also a long period of time.

Although the details will be described later, in the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance B, if you win a rare role, setting suggestion performance B will always be executed, so the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance B is better than the setting suggestion performance A. It can also be said that the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance is higher than the low probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A, which has an extremely low execution probability.

In the high probability mode of setting suggestion effect B, even if setting suggestion effect B is executed before the predetermined number of games (20 games + α) has elapsed, until the end condition of the ED state is satisfied, If the high probability mode is continued and the end conditions of the ED state are met and the transition is made from the high navigation state (advantageous section) to the low navigation state (normal section), setting suggestion performances including setting suggestion performances A and B are performed. If the navigation mode is not executed and the low navigation state (normal section) shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section) again, the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance A is set.

According to this example, by providing a high probability mode period in which the execution probability of setting suggestion effects is high, which is different from the low probability mode period, the game can be immediately ended (immediately quit) after the low probability mode period ends. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate.

In addition, in the ED state, even if a rare combination is won, the additional lottery is not executed, so the player feels like a loss even if he wins a rare combination, but as in this example, setting suggestion performance B By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the player's feelings of loss.

In addition, the period from the end of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation A until the start of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation B, the period from the end of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation B to the start of the high probability mode of setting suggestion presentation A. Although it is preferable that the period until the probability mode starts (the period shown as the normal section in FIG. 31(a)) is shorter, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

<Setting suggestion effect B selection table>
FIG. 31(b) is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used in the setting suggestion effect B lottery.

The setting suggestion performance B lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to perform the setting suggestion performance B, and if so, the content of the performance of the setting suggestion performance B. In this example, if it is determined by the lottery to perform setting suggestion effect B, setting suggestion effect B is executed in the game in which the lottery was executed.

Note that the game in which the setting suggestion effect B is executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed, but may be a game that is later than the game in which the setting suggestion effect B lottery is executed.

Among the "effect contents" in the setting suggestion effect B selection table shown in FIG. The content of performance B is shown.

In setting suggestion performance B, the performance is performed using only the sounds output from the sound output means (in this example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26) among the plurality of types of performance elements.

Note that the number of performance elements used in setting suggestion performance B may be one or more as long as it is smaller than the number of performance elements used in setting suggestion performance A, and the number of performance elements used in setting suggestion performance B may be one or more. , sound output from sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26), and light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24, etc.) One, a plurality of, Alternatively, all can be selected arbitrarily.

Furthermore, the presentation contents of the setting suggestion presentation B are output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26) among the presentation contents of the setting suggestion presentation A explained using FIG. 30(b). Since this is the same as the performance performed using the voice that is played, the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Setting suggestion effect B/low probability mode>
In the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect B, the lottery data corresponding to the low probability mode in the setting suggestion effect B selection table is referred to, and based on the current setting value, it is determined whether or not to execute setting suggestion effect B. If so, the content of the setting suggestion performance B is determined.

For example, if the current setting value is setting 1 to setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and setting suggestion effect B is not executed. If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 99% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the production content "4 or more confirmed voice" will be selected. Execute setting suggestion effect B.

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 98% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will not be executed. Setting suggestion performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 1%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 97% probability that "No execution" will be selected and setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and a 1% probability that the production content "4 or more confirmed audio" will be selected. Execute setting suggestion performance B, execute setting suggestion performance B with performance content "5 or more confirmed audio" with a 1% probability, execute setting suggestion performance B with performance content "6 confirmed audio" with a 1% probability .

<Setting suggestion effect B/high probability mode>
In the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B, the lottery data corresponding to the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance B selection table is referred to, and the content of the performance of the setting suggestion performance B is determined based on the current setting value. In the high probability mode, the probability that "no execution" will be selected is 0% for all settings 1 to 6, and the configuration is such that setting suggestion effect B is always executed.

If the current setting value is setting 1, there is a 38% probability that the setting suggestion effect B for the effect content "even number suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 57% probability will be used to suggest the setting effect for the production content "odd number suggestion voice". Performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 5%.

If the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 57% probability that setting suggestion performance B with the production content "even number suggestion audio" will be executed, and a 38% probability will execute the setting suggestion production B with the production content "odd number suggestion audio". Performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 5%.

If the current setting value is setting 3, there is a 37% probability that setting suggestion performance B with the production content "even number suggestion audio" will be executed, and a 55% probability will execute the setting suggestion production B with the production content "odd number suggestion audio". Performance B is executed, and setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 8%.

If the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 54% probability that the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 36% probability that the setting suggestion effect of the production content "odd number suggestion voice" will be executed. Performance B is executed, setting suggestion performance B with performance content "high setting suggestion sound" is executed with a probability of 8%, and setting suggestion performance B with performance content "4 or more confirmed sound" is executed with a probability of 2%.

If the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 34% probability that setting suggestion performance B with the production content "even number suggestion audio" will be executed, and a 51% probability will execute the setting suggestion production B with the production content "odd number suggestion audio". Execute production B, execute setting suggestion production B with production content "high setting suggestion audio" with a 10% probability, execute setting suggestion production B with production content "4 or more confirmed audio" with a 3% probability, A setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 2%.

If the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 49% probability that the setting suggestion effect B with the effect content "even number suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 33% probability that the setting suggestion effect of the production content "odd number suggestion voice" will be executed. Execute direction B, with a 10% probability, execute setting suggestion direction B with the direction content "high setting suggestion sound", and with a 3.5% probability, execute setting suggestion direction B with the direction content "4 or more confirmed sound" Then, with a probability of 2.5%, the setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "5 or more confirmed audio" is executed, and with a 2% probability, the setting suggestion performance B with the performance content "6 confirmed audio" is executed.

As mentioned above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the high probability mode, compared to the low probability mode, effects that vaguely suggest the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", " This means that the execution probability of "high setting suggestion image") is high. By doing so, even in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to encourage the player to play the game over a long period of time.

In addition, in the low probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so if it is executed, an effect that vaguely suggests the setting value ("even number suggestion image", "odd number suggestion image", "high setting suggestion image") will be executed. By lowering the probability, it is possible to prevent the setting value from becoming too difficult to guess.

Also, the second feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the low probability mode, setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in settings 4 to 6 than in settings 1 to 3. There are several points. By doing this, when executed in the low probability mode where the execution probability itself is extremely low, an effect that gives a good impression will be executed (in the case of settings 4 to 6, the effect that gives a better impression will be executed). (because there is a possibility that the game will be executed), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to encourage him or her to play the game for a long period of time.

Note that the selection probabilities shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example are just an example, and are not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in settings 1 to 3 of low probability mode, it was not supposed to be executed, but it can be set to be executed, and in high probability mode, it was always supposed to be executed, but it is not executed. You can make it happen.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 32. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by the reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 32 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a bet number setting/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether medals have been inserted or not, and preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated or not, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process advances to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line determination process is performed to determine the number of inserted medals and to determine a valid winning line.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the obtained random number value, and the results of this internal lottery are displayed. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including the activation combination) is internally won, the flag for that winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. Note that this reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Further, in step S105, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, based on the start lever operation, the performance state control process regarding the control of the AT system game state described above is executed. In step S107, production processing is executed. In this production processing, various production controls and the like are performed.

In step S108, a reel rotation start process is executed, and rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is created in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S110. In addition, in this step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a winning determination process is performed to determine winning. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a small winning combination 3 (Bell) has been won. Further, in this step S110, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the winning determination result to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, medal award processing is performed. In the medal awarding process, if a prize is won in any winning combination that has a payout, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, a gaming state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to transition of each RT-based game state is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is satisfied. Also, preparations are made for transmitting a gaming status command including information indicating the current RT-based gaming status.

In step S113, the performance state control process regarding the control of the AT system game state described above is executed. In step S114, high navigation state termination processing regarding the termination of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 33) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 33. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 34. Note that FIG. 34A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 34(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 34(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 34(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S3003. In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 34(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 34(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 34(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 35. Note that FIG. 35A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 35(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 35(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 35(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 35(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 536, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S604, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 35(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 35(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 35(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10). In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S606 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 35(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 536. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 534. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Example 1 of setting suggestion performance A>
Next, an example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described using FIG. 36. Note that FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Production example 1 is a production example where, in a game in which the low probability mode of setting suggestion production A is set, a small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). It shows.

The state shown in FIG. 36(a) is the state before the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a low probability setting suggestion effect A is displayed in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A character C1 (in this example, a sabohani character) indicating that a mode is set is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 36(b) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on). In this example, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A/Press in order>
The state shown in FIG. 36(c) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by sequential pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in the order in which setting suggestion effect A can be performed (pressing in order), setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed using the setting suggestion effect A selection table. , it has been decided to execute setting suggestion performance A through the lottery.

In addition, since it has been decided that setting suggestion effect A will be executed in the next game, a treasure box imitation is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a suggestion effect suggesting that setting suggestion effect A will be executed. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 36(d) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game. In this example, as setting suggestion effect A, a video PD1 (4 or more confirmed images) of rice popping out of an opened treasure chest is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and from the speakers 272 and 277, a video exclusively for setting suggestion effect A is displayed. BGM (4 or more confirmed sounds) is being output.

Since players cannot distinguish the advantages and disadvantages of AT by looking at it, it is necessary to encourage players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, but according to this example, in low base games By executing setting suggestion performance A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game where AT is advantageous, and since it is possible to suggest the setting value, it is possible to increase the player's interest. can be increased.

<Example 1 of setting suggestion effect A/Irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 36(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL), and the state shown in FIG. 36(f) is This is a state showing the performance in the next game.

In this example, since the stop button 137 to 139 was stopped in an operation order (irregular press) that made setting suggestion effect A impossible to execute, setting suggestion effect A (in this example, video PD1) and setting suggestion effect None of the suggestive effects (in this example, character C2) that suggest that effect A is to be executed are executed.

If the setting suggestion performance A is executed with an irregular press that will result in a high base game, the player will be able to see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals inserted, but according to this example, the irregular press that will result in a high base game Since the setting suggestion effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked due to a high base game, and it is possible to encourage (prompt) the player to play a low base game.

<Example 2 of setting suggestion performance A>
Next, an example 2 of setting suggestion rendering A will be described using FIG. 37. Note that FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

Production example 2 is a production example where, in a game in which the high probability mode of setting suggestion production A is set, a small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). It shows.

The state shown in FIG. 37(a) is the state immediately after the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a high probability setting suggestion effect A is displayed in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. A character C3 (in this example, a sabohani character covered with an aura image) indicating that a mode is set is displayed.
In this example, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed down (lever on).

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A/Press in order>
The state shown in FIG. 37(b) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by sequential pressing (LCR).

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in the order in which setting suggestion effect A can be performed (pressing in order), setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed using the setting suggestion effect A selection table. , it has been decided to execute setting suggestion performance A through the lottery.

In addition, since it has been decided that setting suggestion effect A will be executed in the next game, a treasure box imitation is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 as a suggestion effect suggesting that setting suggestion effect A will be executed. Character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 37(c) is a state in which setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.

In this example, as setting suggestion effect A, a video PD2 (5 or more confirmed images) in which a panda character jumps out of an opened treasure chest is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and setting suggestion effect A is displayed from the speakers 272 and 277. Dedicated BGM (5 or more confirmed sounds) is output.

Since players cannot distinguish the advantages and disadvantages of AT by looking at it, it is necessary to encourage players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, but according to this example, in low base games By executing setting suggestion performance A, it is possible to encourage (encourage) the player to play a low base game where AT is advantageous, and since it is possible to suggest the setting value, it is possible to increase the player's interest. can be increased.

FIG. 37(d) shows a state in which the setting suggestion performance A has been completed and the high probability mode of the setting suggestion performance A has been shifted to the low probability mode.

In this example, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the display of the setting suggestion effect A started, the setting suggestion effect A is ended and the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , the normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the character C1 (in this example, Sabohani's characters) are displayed.

<Example 2 of setting suggestion effect A/Irregular press>
The state shown in FIG. 37(e) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL), and the state shown in FIG. 37(f) is This is a state showing the performance in the next game.

In this example, since the stop buttons 137 to 139 were stopped in an operation order (irregular press) that made setting suggestion presentation A impossible to execute, setting suggestion presentation A (in this example, video PD2) and setting suggestion presentation None of the suggestive effects (in this example, character C2) that suggest that effect A is to be executed are executed.

If the setting suggestion performance A is executed with an irregular press that will result in a high base game, the player will be able to see through the setting while suppressing the number of medals inserted, but according to this example, the irregular press that will result in a high base game Since the setting suggestion effect A is not executed by pressing, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked due to a high base game, and it is possible to encourage (prompt) the player to play a low base game.

In addition, in this example, when the stop button 137 to 139 is stopped by an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL), the high probability mode of setting suggestion performance A is continued, and the high probability mode The character C3 (in this example, the Sabohani character covered with an aura image) continues to be displayed, which suggests that the setting is set, but the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is triggered by the irregular press stop operation. The configuration may be such that the transition is made to the low probability mode.

In addition, in setting suggestion performance A of this example, the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance A was also made different depending on the setting suggestion image, but a common BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance A is output regardless of which setting suggestion image is displayed. You may also do this. That is, in this case, the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance A is BGM that notifies that setting suggestion performance A is being executed.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect A in this example is not executed in the AT state or the ED state, it may be possible to execute it also in the AT state or the ED state.

<Example of setting suggestion performance B>
Next, an example of the setting suggestion effect B will be described using FIG. 38. Note that FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the setting suggestion effect B in chronological order.

This production example is a production example where, in a game in which the high probability mode of setting suggestion production B is set, the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on). It shows.

The states shown in FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c) are AT states in advantageous sections. In the state shown in FIG. 38(a), the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies that there are 201 games remaining in the advantageous section, and the speakers 272 and 277 output BGM during AT. .

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 2B, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies that there are 200 games remaining in the advantageous section, and the speakers 272 and 277 output BGM during AT. There is.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(c), the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 notifies the transition from the next game to the ED state, and the speakers 272 and 277 output BGM during AT.

On the other hand, the states shown in FIGS. 38(d) to 38(f) are ED states in advantageous sections. In the state shown in FIG. 38(d), the ED effect is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and BGM during the ED is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(e), since the rare role (in this example, small role 1 (watermelon)) was internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 was pressed (lever on), the setting suggestion performance B was selected. A setting suggestion performance B lottery is executed using a selection table, and it is decided to execute setting suggestion performance B based on the lottery. In this case, 4 or more confirmed voices) are output.

In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 6(f), since the rare winning combination (in this example, the small winning combination 2 (cherry)) was internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 was pressed (lever on), the setting suggestion performance B was selected. A setting suggestion performance B lottery is executed using a selection table, and it is decided to execute setting suggestion performance B based on the lottery. In this case, a high setting suggestion sound) is output.

According to this example, by executing setting suggestion performance B, it is possible to suggest setting values, thereby increasing the player's interest. In addition, since it is possible to execute setting suggestion performance B (second setting suggestion performance) that suggests the currently set setting value, which is different from setting suggestion performance A (first setting suggestion performance), setting suggestion performance B (second setting suggestion performance) can be executed. Variations can be increased, and expectations and interest in the setting suggestion performance can be increased.

In addition, according to this example, there is a high possibility that setting suggestion presentations will be executed more often than in the low probability mode of setting suggestion presentations, so performing setting suggestion presentations with fewer presentation elements will prevent setting suggestion presentations from feeling bothersome. can be prevented. Further, in the ED state, it is possible to prevent interference with other performances, to perform various performances, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, in the ED state, even if a rare combination is won, the additional lottery is not executed, so the player feels like a loss even if he wins a rare combination, but as in this example, setting suggestion performance B By doing so, it is possible to alleviate the player's feelings of loss.

In addition, in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 output the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance B in addition to the BGM during ED, but instead of the BGM during ED, only the BGM dedicated to setting suggestion performance B is output. It may be configured as follows.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect B in this example is executed in the AT state or the ED state, it may be possible to execute it in states other than the AT state or the ED state, or it may be executed only in the ED state. Also good.

As explained above, the game machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. ), a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels, and a plurality of setting values. Setting means (e.g., setting key, setting switch) that can set one of the setting values (e.g., setting 1 to setting 6), and lottery information corresponding to the plurality of setting values set by the setting means. an internal lottery means (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 32) that derives an internal winning result based on the internal lottery result derived by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. a stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 32) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed; A gaming value imparting means (for example, the medal payout process shown in FIG. 32) that awards gaming value (for example, medals) according to the manner in which the reels are stopped, and a gaming value imparting means (for example, the medal payout process shown in FIG. 32) that controls the progress of the game and makes it easier to acquire the gaming value. A changeable game control means (for example, the game state control process shown in FIG. 32), and a performance control means that executes a performance according to the progress of the game (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit shown in FIG. 26). control unit 500), the game control means is configured to control a first game state (for example, normal game state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, , AT lottery), and the first condition is satisfied while the first gaming state is set (for example, winning the AT lottery). terminating the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the result of the player's operation of the stop button in the first gaming state, The means is capable of changing the ease of acquiring the game value in the second gaming state that is set after the first condition is satisfied, and the stop control means is configured to change the ease of acquiring the gaming value in the second gaming state that is set after the first condition is satisfied, and the stop control means The lottery result (for example, any of the small winning combinations 3b (Pushing order bell RLC), Small winning combination 3c (Pushing order bell CRL), Small winning combination 3e (Pushing order bell CLR), Small winning combination 3f (Pushing order bell RCL)) is derived. When the stop button is operated in the first operation (for example, sequential press (LCR), scissor hit (LRC)) in a game in which the reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, "bell" In a game in which the stop button is stopped by a symbol combination other than "Symbol - Bell symbol - Bell symbol" and the first lottery result is derived, the stop button is pressed by a second operation (for example, an irregular press (CLR, CRL, RLC, means for stopping the plurality of reels in a second stopping mode (for example, a symbol combination of "bell symbol - bell symbol - bell symbol") when the reels are operated in any one of RCL), and the above-mentioned gaming value The awarding means may be configured to provide a method for dispensing the plurality of reels in the second stopping mode (e.g., paying out 12 medals) than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out one medal). ) is a means for imparting more of the gaming value, and the game control means is configured such that the first lottery result is derived in the first gaming state and the plurality of reels are set in the second lottery state. When the reels are stopped in the stop mode, the first lottery result is derived in the first gaming state, and the first condition is more satisfied than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. In the case where the ease of acquiring the game value in the second game state that is set after the game is satisfied is made disadvantageous for the player (for example, in a game where a stop operation is performed by an irregular press in a normal game, the AT lottery is Do not execute it, or reduce the number of games in one set of AT games, or the number of irregular presses will make the initial number of games and the probability of winning an AT disadvantage disadvantageous.A point lottery will be held for each game, and the number of points will be determined according to the points. Operation navigation for AT games: If you press an irregular button on a game machine that determines AT performance, the point lottery will be disadvantageous, and if you perform a stop operation with an irregular press in a normal game, the probability of winning the AT lottery will be lowered.Operation navigation for AT games. (or always change it unfavorably), do not execute the set continuation lottery in the AT game, lower the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT game, etc. If the stop button is operated in the first operation in a game in which the second condition is met (for example, a game in which the small winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination) is internally won), the currently set setting value is It is a means that can execute the first setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect A (video PD1) shown in FIG. 36(e), setting suggestion effect A (video PD2) shown in FIG. 37(c)). This game machine is characterized by:

Players cannot tell the advantages and disadvantages of AT by looking at it, so it is necessary to encourage players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, but it is possible to perform setting suggestion effects in low base games. By doing so, it is possible to encourage (encourage) players to play low base games where AT is advantageous, and it is also possible to suggest setting values, so it is possible to increase the interest of players. .

Note that the "condition for the second condition to be satisfied" according to the present invention is not limited to internal winning of a winning combination, but also includes winning a certain winning combination, a certain gaming state (for example, ED state of an advantageous section) , winning a certain lottery, or that a certain performance (for example, a continuous performance) is being executed.

Further, the performance control means does not perform the first setting suggestion performance if the stop button is operated in the second operation even if the second condition is satisfied (or may not be carried out).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being overlooked due to high base games, and it is also possible to encourage (prompt) players to play low base games.

Further, the second condition may include that a second lottery result (for example, a minor winning combination 5 (one-card winning combination)) is derived by the internal lottery means. A winning combination that adjusts the base. is only for adjusting the base, so the winning probability cannot be changed to adjust the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effects, and the frequency of execution of setting suggestion effects may become too high or too low. Although there is a risk that it may become too much, if the second condition includes that the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, then the winning combination that adjusts the base can be used as a condition for executing the setting suggestion performance. By using a winning combination that is different from the winning combination, it is possible to easily adjust the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion performance.

Further, the first setting suggestion performance may be a performance that can be executed in the first gaming state.

Even if the first setting suggestion effect is executed during AT, the advantage or disadvantage of AT has already been determined during AT, and the timing is too late to encourage low base play, so it is not necessary to execute it during normal play. However, if the first setting suggestion performance is a performance that can be executed in the first gaming state, the first setting suggestion performance is a performance that also includes the effect of encouraging low base play where AT is advantageous. Therefore, by executing it in a normal game before AT, it becomes possible to more effectively encourage a low base game in which AT is advantageous.

Further, the effect control means may generate a second setting suggestion effect different from the first setting suggestion effect, which suggests the currently set setting value (for example, setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 38(e)). (4 or more confirmed voices)) may be used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variations of the setting suggestion performance, and it is possible to increase expectations and interest in the setting suggestion performance.

Furthermore, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) that are rotatably driven and decorated with a plurality of types of symbols, and A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) are provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels and are used to individually stop the rotation of the reels, and a plurality of setting values (for example, setting buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1). A setting means (for example, a setting key, a setting switch) that can set one of the setting values from 1 to 6), and an internal lottery information corresponding to the plurality of setting values set by the setting means. After the internal lottery means for deriving the winning result (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 32) and the plurality of reels are rotated, the internal lottery means stops based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. A stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 32) performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the operated stop button, and a performance control means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 32) performs a performance according to the progress of the game. , a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. Means capable of executing setting suggestion performance A (video PD1) shown in , setting suggestion performance A (video PD2) shown in FIG. 37(c), setting suggestion performance B (4 or more confirmed sounds) shown in FIG. The setting suggestion performance is displayed by a performance element (for example, a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 24) or output from a sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 26). sound output from a light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24, a lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 24), or a movable body (for example, the shutter shown in FIG. 24). (Shielding device) 163) movement (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion/contraction, vertical movement, etc.) is used to suggest the currently set setting value.

According to the game machine according to this example, it is possible to suggest the currently set setting value by the setting suggestion effect using the effect element, so it is possible to increase the interest of the players and improve the operating rate. can.

Further, the predetermined period includes a first period (for example, the period of the low probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 30(a)) and a second period different from the first period (for example, a non- 10 games after the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section (the period of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 30(a)), and the setting suggestion effect is higher than the first period. The second period may be easier to implement. Note that the "first period" according to the present invention may be any period in which it is more difficult to perform the setting suggestion effect than the "second period", and may be a period in which the setting suggestion is not executed.

With such a configuration, by providing a second period that is different from the first period and has a high probability of executing the setting suggestion effect, it is difficult to immediately end the game (immediately quit) after the first period ends. It is possible to improve the operating rate.

The game controller also includes a game control means (for example, a game state control process shown in FIG. 32) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring game values, and the game control means One gaming state can be set from a plurality of gaming states including at least a state (for example, normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, AT state) different from the first gaming state, and the first gaming state Based on a first condition being satisfied (for example, winning an AT lottery) while the gaming state is being set, the first gaming state is ended and the second gaming state is set. The second period may be set after the second gaming state ends and before the first period.

With such a configuration, by setting a second period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high after the second gaming state advantageous to the player ends, the game can be played after the second gaming state ends. It is possible to make it difficult to terminate immediately (immediately quit), and it is possible to improve the operating rate.

Further, the predetermined period may be a third period different from the first period and the second period (for example, 20 games in the ED state shown in FIG. 31(a) (high probability mode of setting suggestion performance B) period), and the setting suggestion effect is executed more in the third period than in the first period (for example, the low probability mode period of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 30(a)). The third period is easier than the second period (for example, the 10 games after the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section (the period of the high probability mode of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 30(a))). The period is long, and the effect element (for example, the liquid crystal display shown in FIG. 37(c)) used in the setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect A (video PD2) shown in FIG. 37(c)) in the second period Display by the device 157 and sounds output from the speakers 272 and 277) are used in the setting suggestion performance in the third period (for example, setting suggestion performance B (4 or more confirmed sounds) shown in FIG. 38(e)). There may be fewer production elements (for example, only the sounds output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIGS. 38(e) and 38(f)).

With such a configuration, the third period is longer than the second period, and there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than during the second period, so it is possible to set the setting with fewer effect elements. By performing the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from feeling bothersome. In addition, it is possible to prevent interference with other performances during the third period, to perform various performances, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed within the game machine are reused. Further, the main control section, the first sub-control section, and the second sub-control section may be configured in one chip, or the main control section and the first sub-control section may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. good. Moreover, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Further, the functions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment to another configuration, the range of games may be further expanded.

The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to a game machine represented by a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), a reel game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Liquid crystal display device

Claims (1)

a display means;
A light emitting means;
A door body that is installed on the front of the game machine and can be opened and closed;
a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body;
an operating means capable of performing a certain operation;
Multiple reels decorated with multiple types of designs and driven to rotate,
a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping rotation of the reels;
A game machine comprising:
The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state,
The detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state,
By performing a predetermined operation regarding the detection means, the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator,
When the certain operation is performed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the management display is displayed. is configured to be able to start
The reel is configured not to start displaying the management display even if the certain operation is performed in the first state in which the reels are rotating;
When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode by the stop button in the first state and the state where the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, is configured to start displaying the administrative view and
When the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode by the stop button in the first state and the state where the reels are rotating and the certain operation is being performed, is configured not to start displaying the administrative view and
The display of the management display cannot be started even if the certain operation is performed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state,
In the state where the management display is displayed, even if the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state, the management display continues to be displayed;
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a first light emitting mode when a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state,
The light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a second light emitting mode when a game is possible and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state,
The light emitting means is turned off when the management display is being displayed and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state.
A game machine characterized by: